Home

Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. Introduction Do not open when hot ine air filter m J da ine coolant B ef E ine coolant temperature l m i Ga ine oil m da m XxX re osive gas Fan warning Fasten safety belt Front airbag Front fog lamps Fuel pump reset Fuse compartment Hazard warning flashers Heated rear window Heated windshield EEEH PEI B Interior luggage compartment g release ct w F x Ya Lighting control C 7 Low tire pressure warning Maintain correct fluid level Panic alarm able Parking aid y gt Parking brake Power steering fluid Power windows front rear Power window lockout Service engine soon Side airbag Stability control P1013 elel Introduction Windshield wash and wipe DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle Additionally when your vehicle is in for serv
2. Play song lt name gt What s playing Play track lt name gt lt name gt is a dynamic listing meaning that it could be the name of any desired group artist song etc Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete Voice commands which are only available in folder mode Voice Command Guide Autoplay Turn on to listen to music which has already been randomly indexed during the indexing process 322 SYNC Voice Command Guide Turn off and the system does not begin to play any of your music until all media has all been indexed Indexing times can vary from device to device and also with regard to the number of songs being indexed Search genre or Play The system searches all the data from your indexed music genre and if available begins to play the chosen type of music You can only play genres of music which are present in the GENRE metadata tags that you have on your digital media player Similar music The system compiles a playlist and then plays similar music to what is currently playing from the USB port using indexed metadata information Search Play Artist The system searches for a specific artist track or album Track Album from the music indexed through the USB port Refine This allows you to make your previous command more specific For example if you asked to search and play all music by acer
3. Auto Dealership Govt Office Public Transit Education 396 MyFord Touch i Equipped To expand these listings press the in front of the PO listing The system also allows you to sort the POls alphabetically by distance or by cityseekr listings if available cityseekr Note cityseekr point of interest POI information is limited to approximately 154 cities 132 in the U S 13 in Canada and 9 in Mexico citysee kr cityseekr when available is a service which provides additional information about certain POls such as restaurants hotels and attractions E142634 When you have selected a POI the location and information appear such as address and phone number If the POI is listed with cityseekr you also see information such as a brief description check in and check out times when the restaurant is open etc Press More Information for a longer review alist of services and facilities the average room or meal price as well as the website This screen displays the POI icon such as Hotel yi a Coffeehouse Food amp Drink Nightlife Attraction This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple categories within the system When you are viewing additional information for hotels cityseekr will also tell you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons For restaurants cityseekr can provide information such as star rating aver
4. E A Power Volume Switch the audio system on and off by pressing the button Turn to adjust the volume B CD slot Insert a CD C TUNE In radio mode select a frequency band and press one of the seek buttons The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction In SIRIUS mode select the previous or next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc use the SEEK buttons find to the previous or next channel in the selected category Audio System Eject Eject a CD E Seek Fast Forward Press to go to the next track or available radio station Press and hold to fast forward through the current track or to quickly advance through the radio band in individual increments E Seek Reverse Press to go to the previous track or available radio station Press and hold to reverse through the current track or to quickly reverse through the radio band in individual increments AUDIO UNIT VEHICLES WITH SONY AM FM CD WARNING Driving while distracted can result in T loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws th
5. Navigation list of commands Voice settings list of commands Phone list of commands Help If equipped Interaction Mode Novice mode Voice Settings provides more detailed interaction and Voice settings allow you to customize the guidance while the advanced mode level of system interaction help and has less audible interaction and more feedback The system defaults to standard tone prompts interaction which uses candidate lists and Confirmation Prompts These are confirmation prompts as these provide the short questions the system asks when highest level of guidance and feedback it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request If turned off the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings Phone and Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice commands The system creates these lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command To access these settings using the touchscreen 343 MyFord Touch it equipped Press the Settings icon Settings then Voice Control Select from the following Interaction Mode Confirmation Prompts Media Candidate Lists Phone Candidate Lists Voice Control Volume To access these settings using voice commands 1 Press the voice icon after the tone so
6. Safety Belt Minder Child Restraint and Safety Belt Ma iIntenaniG its ircccsicisccsdsdstsestisssserstSisssss 32 Personal Safety System Personal Safety System oceans 33 Supplementary Restraints System Principle Of Operation Driver and Passenger Airbags KEG ADAT aaan Front Passenger Sensing System 36 Side Airbags eed 39 Side Curtain Airbags 40 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicato 4 Airbag DISPOSAL cescesestecsestesestesesteseeeses 42 Keys and Remote Controls General Information on Radio FLO QUENCIES cscsesssssesesessessseesssessseseesesesees 43 Remote CONTIOL cecseessesseseeseessesseesteseeseeseees 43 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Eloa IN 0 AAEN EE eee NENNE 48 MyKey Principle of OperatiOn ccccceeeeeseeeeees 49 Creating a MYKeY cceesesesseesesesesesesesesnees 49 Clearing All MYK YS ccccscesessesesessestesesteees 50 Checking MyKey System Status 50 Using MyKey With Remote Start GVSTE M Saadanin aae 50 MyKey TroubleShooting ccccccsseseesneees 51 Locks Locking and UNlOCKING ccceeccesessesesteseees 52 Keyless Entry Interior Luggage Compartment EY e e cesscstsazsdesszdassszesciiessslasescdusseseusanints 58 Security Passive Anti Theft SyStemM 2 59 Anti Theft Alarm ceccscsssssescsssssssssssssssseess 61 Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel 62 Audio CONTKOL
7. Fuse relay number nis Fuse amp rating Protected components Lighting ambient glovebox vanity dome 10A trunk 2 75A Memory seats Lumbar Power mirror 3 20A Driver door unlock 4 5A Not used spare 5 20A Subwoofer amplifier 236 Fuses Fuse relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 6 104 Not used spare 7 104 Not used spare 8 104 Not used spare 9 104 Not used spare 10 54 Keypad 1l 54 Not used 12 754A Climate control Gear shift 13 754 Steering wheel column Cluster Datalink ogic 14 104 Not used 15 104 Datalink Gateway module 16 15A Not used spare 17 54 Not used 18 54 Ignition Push button stop start 19 54A Passenger airbag disabled indicator Transmission range 20 54 Not used 21 54A Humid and incar temp 22 54 Occupant classification sensor 23 10A Delayed Accessory Power inverter logic Moonroof logic 24 30A Central lock unlock 25 30A Driver s door window mirror 26 30A Front passenger s door window mirror 237 Fuses Fuse relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 27 30A Moonroof 28 20A Sony amplifier 29 30A Rear driver s side door window 30 30A Rear passenger s side door window 31 15A Not used spare 32 10A GPS Voice control Display Adaptive cruise control Rad
8. l E144501 See Cruise Control page 183 E144504 A End a call B Answer acall INFORMATION DISPLAY C Voice recognition CONTROL See SYNC page 298 See MyFord Touch page 335 CRUISE CONTROL Type E144636 See Information Displays page 83 E144500 Steering Wheel Cluster Display Control Features E144811 If equipped with MyFord system This control functions the same as the center control on the faceplate See Audio unit page 107 MyFord Touche Use this control to adjust the right side of the cluster display Navigate through the screen and press OK to select See MyFord Touch page 335 64 Wipers and Washers WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers Note Make sure the windshield wipers are switched off before entering a car wash Note Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears If that doesn t resolve the issue install new wiper blades Note Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield E144495 A Single wipe Intermittent wipe Normal wipe High speed wipe o oW Intermittent Wipe E144496 A Shortest wipe interval B Intermittent wipe C Longest wipe interval Use the rotary control to adjust t
9. Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts 239 Working with the Engine Off 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Turnoff the engine and remove the key if equipped 3 Block the wheels Working with the Engine On WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD E142457 1 To open the hood go inside the vehicle and pull the hood release handle located under the instrument panel Go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary release lever which is located under the front of the hood to your right of the center of the vehicle driver s side toward the headlight Maintenance 3 Release the hood latch by pushing the 4 Raise the hood and support it with the secondary release lever to your left prop rod toward the center of the vehicle 5 To close the hood lower and secure A the prop rod in the clip OA 6 Lower the hood and allow it to drop the last 8 to 11 inches 20 to 30 centimeters Note Make sure that the hood is closed properl
10. E144500 The cruise controls are located on the steering wheel Switching Cruise Control On Press and release ON The indicator will appear in the instrument cluster Setting a Speed 1 Accelerate to the desired speed 2 Press and release SET 3 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal The indicator will change colors in the instrument cluster Changing the Set Speed Note f you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal the set speed will not change When you release the accelerator pedal you will return to the speed that you previously set Press and hold SET or SET Release the control when you reach the desired speed Press and release SET or SET The set speed will change in approximately 1mph 2 km h increments Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed Press and release SET Canceling the Set Speed Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal You will not erase the set speed Resuming the Set Speed Press and release RES Switching Cruise Control Off Note You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off Cruise Control USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL iF Equipped WARNINGS Always pay close attention to changing road conditions especially when using adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control cannot replace attentive driving Failing to follow any of the warnings bel
11. Instrument Cluster Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See Emission Control System page 154 Stability Control It will flash when the system is ce active If it remains illuminated or does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on this indicates a malfunction During a malfunction the system will switch off Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately See Using Stability Control page 173 Stability Control Off r It will illuminate when you switch cc the system off It will go out ida when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off See Using Stability Control page 173 Trunk Ajar Displays when the ignition is on and the trunk is not completely closed AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Key in Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when you open the driver s door and you have left the key in the ignition with it in the off or accessory position Keyless Warning Alert if Equipped Chirps the horn twice when you exit the vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN indicating the vehicle is still on Headlamps On Warning Chime Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver s door and you have left the he
12. 106 Audio unit Vehicles With FRAG I a ARENE E A fee ence 107 Audio unit Vehicles With Premium AM EM C Di rare ei 109 Audio unit Vehicles With Sony AM FM CD uessssssssssssessecssecssessesstessecseesseesses 110 Auxiliary Input JACK eseseseseesteseeeees 114 USB PoOft sssssssssssessrnrisisssssrrrsssssrnrisussrrrrrerrnnsne 114 Media HUD irisi 115 Satellite RAGIOw A ccccccesesessesestesessesesseenesees 115 Climate Control Manual Climate Control 118 Automatic Climate Control 119 Automatic Climate Control 121 Automatic Climate Control 123 Hints on Controlling the Interior UIC E desteessastiees Heated Windows and Mirrors Cabin Air Filter cesses ReMmOte Sta tessaa Seats Sitting in the Correct Position Head Restraints cccscseeceesees es MathiWial Seats esczszeccscczeseczesecsesccseseceisinereeitsts Power SANUS cnsnnnnnannnsssssstet Memory Function Universal Garage Door Opener Universal Garage Door Openet 136 Auxiliary Power Points Auxiliary Power POints ccccscesesesesseens 140 Storage Compartments Center CONSOLE ccesessessesessesestesessesteseeesees Overhead Console Starting and Stopping the Engine General INfOrMatiON ccseseceeseeeeeeees 143 Ignition SWITCH cece ceceseeeseesestesesteseetessesees 143 Table of Contents Keyless Starting cesses 143 Starting a Gasoline Engine 145 Engine Block H atel ccscsc
13. 376 Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are phone dependent features To check your phone s compatibility see your phone s user manual and visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca Pairing Your Phone for the First Time WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving 1 The first thing you must do to use SYNC s phone features is to pair your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone with SYNC This allows you to use your phone in a hands free manner Note Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that the transmission is in position P 1 Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s user guide if necessary 2 MyFord Touch i equipped 3 When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC in the rad
14. 4 Remove the tool and reinstall the panel 5 Start the vehicle and release the parking brake Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle A new vehicle or transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the strategy must be relearned If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Note Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Note Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear HILL START ASSIST iF equipPeD WARNINGS The system does not replace the parking brake When you leave your vehicle always apply the parking brake and move the transmission selector lever into position P Park You must remain in your vehicle once you have activated the system During all times you are responsible f
15. 5 After 25 seconds the Service Oil reset complete message will be displayed 6 Release both the accelerator and brake pedals 7 The Service Oil reset complete message will no longer be displayed 8 Rotate the key to the off position For vehicles with push button start press the start button to turn the vehicle off completely w ENGINE COOLANT CHECK 2 5L 1 6L ECOBOOST 2 0L ECOBOOST Checking the Engine Coolant When the engine is cold check the concentration and level of the engine coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information See Scheduled Maintenance page 420 Note Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir Note Coolant expands when it is hot The level may extend beyond the MAX mark Note f the level is at the MIN mark below the MIN mark or empty add coolant immediately See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48 to 50 which equates to a freeze point between 30 F degrees 34 C and 34 F 37 C Note For best results coolant concentration should be tested with a refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300 ROB75240 available from your authorized dealer Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentrations Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze or winds
16. E147165 1 Place aprogrammed intelligent access key in the backup slot in the center console 2 Wait 5 seconds then press the START STOP button 3 Remove the intelligent access key Security 4 Within 10 seconds place a second programmed intelligent access key in the backup slot and press the START STOP button 5 Wait 5 seconds then press the START STOP button again 6 Remove the intelligent access key 7 Wait 5 seconds then place the unprogrammed intelligent access key in the backup slot and press the START STOP button The intelligent access key is now programmed Verify the remote control functions operate and the vehicle starts with the new intelligent access key If it was not programmed successfully wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7 If you are still unsuccessful take your vehicle to your authorized dealer ANTI THEFT ALARM The system will warn you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle It will be triggered if any door the luggage compartment or the hood is opened without using the key remote control or keyless entry keypad The direction indicators will flash and the horn will sound if unauthorized entry is attempted while the alarm is armed Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle Arming the Alarm The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in the ignition Electronically lock the vehicle
17. Fuel Economy Option Option 2 DTE X X Inst Fuel Econ X Average Fuel X X Fuel History X Fuel History Duration 5 10 or 30 minute DTE Distance To Empty shows the approximate distance the vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in the tank Changes in driving pattern may cause the value to vary Inst Fuel Econ This display shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy Average Fuel Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset Fuel History shows a bar chart of your fuel history Fuel History Duration shows fuel usage over a 5 10 or 30 minute time span 88 Information Displays Info In this mode you can view different vehicle system information and perform a system check Information Auto Stop Start Available Auto Start Stop messaging will provide details about what is happening with your system See Informa tion Messages page 91 Driver Alert MyKey System Check All active warnings will display first if applicable The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status Use the up down arrow buttons to scroll through the list Note Some items are optional and may Settings not appear In this mode you can configure different driver setting choices Settings Driver Traction Ctrl On Off Assist Blindspot On default on key cycle Off Collision Warning
18. B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac maintaining control ona slippery surface USING STABILITY CONTROL AdvanceTrac The system automatically activates when you start your engine The AdvanceTrac system cannot be completely turned off but the ESC system is disabled when the transmission selector lever is in position R The traction control portion of the system can be turned off independently See Using Traction Control page 172 Parking Aids PARKING AID iF EquippeD WARNINGS To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the system as contained in this section Sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Traffic control systems inclement weather air brakes and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system this may include reduced performance or a false activation 1 To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the sensing system This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground Certain add on devices such as large l trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may bl
19. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB You are not bound by the decision and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute and decision are admissible in the court action Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford is then bound by the decision and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this pr
20. Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Note Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down When climbing a steep slope or hill start ina lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turnaround because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control E143949 Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer th
21. During operation lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle Ca 4 xxxxxxxx amp XX KKK E142435 The camera is located on the trunk Using the Rear View Camera System The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in R Reverse The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle Active guidelines Show the intended path of your vehicle when reversing Fixed guidelines Show the actual path your vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you Centerline If applicable Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object i e a trailer Note f the transmission is in R Reverse and the luggage compartment is ajar no rear view camera features are displayed Note f the image comes on while the transmission is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer 180 Note When towing the camera only sees what is being towed behind your vehicle This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen In some vehicles the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow connector is engaged Note The camera may not operate correctly
22. Press the phone button 2 Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands to place the second call Once actively in the second call press Menu 3 Scroll until Join Calls appears and press OK Press OK again when Join Calls appears Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts 1 Press OK to select then scroll through your phonebook contacts 2 Press OK again when the desired selection appears in the display 3 Press the phone button Call History Access your call history log 1 Press OK to select then scroll through your call history options incoming outgoing or missed 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display 3 Press the phone button to call the selection Return Exit the current menu 306 SYNC Accessing Features through the Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu Phone menu The phone menu allows you to redial a 2 Scroll to cycle through number access your call history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone and system settings You can also access advanced features such as 911 Assist Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services When You Select You Can Phone Redial Redial the last number called if available Press OK to select then press OK again to confirm Call History Allows you to access any previously dialed received or missed calls while your phone has been connected to the system 1 Press OK to s
23. Return exits the current menu when you press OK When you select Send Text Message and your phone supports this feature you have the following choices of pre defined messages Be there in 10 minutes Be there in 20 minutes Call me Call U later Can t talk right now Can t wait to see you I love you I need more directions I m stuck in traffic No Thanks Too funny Where R you Why Yes To send the message SYNC Press OK when the desired selection is in the display The system now needs to know who to send the message to Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries You can also select Enter Number to audibly enter the desired number Accessing Your Phone Settings These are phone dependent features Your phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone text message notification modify your phone book and also set up automatic download 1 Press the phone button Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific 2 Scroll until Phone Settings appears contact then press OK Press OK when the contact appears 3 Scroll to select from the following and press OK again to confirm when options the system asks if you would like to send the message Each text message is sent with the following signature This message was sent from my lt Ford or Lincoln gt When You Select You Can Phone Status See the provider name
24. Use 911 Assist Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services Traffic Directions amp Information if equipped Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands Stream music from your connected phone Text message Use the advanced voice recognition system Charge your USB device if your device supports this Make sure that you review your device s user guide before using it with SYNC Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own Monday Saturday 8 30am 8 00pm EST Inthe United States call 1 888 270 1055 In Canada call 1 800 565 3673 Times are subject to change due to holidays SYNC SYNC Owner Account Why do need a SYNC owner account Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports online Required to activate the subscription based SYNC Services and to personalize your Saved Points and Favorites Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC Access to customer support for any questions you may have Driving Restrictions For your safety certain features are speed dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph 5 km h Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in 1 loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
25. 223 Overhead COnsole c cccccssccsecssesssessessesees 142 P Parking Aid Front Sensing System Rear Sensing System Parking Aids Passive Anti Theft System SecuriLock PATS See Passive Anti Theft System Perchlorate Personal Safety System How Does the Personal Safety System Making Calls Pairing Subsequent Phones Pairing Your Phone for the First Time Phone Menu Options Phone Settings Receiving Calls Text Messaging Index Power Door Locks See Locking and Unlocking Power Seats Power Lumbar Power Steering Fluid Check Power Windows Accessory Delay Bounce Back Global Opening and Closing One Touch Down One Touch Up Window LOCK jac uusderccassivcnnsiccmeencin 73 Rear Seat AM rest 135 Rear Seats Rear View CAMEL A eessssssesesesesssesseteseseseees 179 Using the Rear View Camera System 180 Rear View Camera See Rear View Camera 179 Recommended Towing Weights 210 REPU CLIN Se ecne 151 Easy Fuel Capless Fuel System Remote Control Car Finder Integrated Keyhead Transmitters Intelligent Access Key Remote Start Replacing the Battery Sounding a Panic Alarm Using the Key Blade Remote Start Automatic Settings Heated and Cooled Devices Last Settings Removing a Headlamp Repairing Minor Paint Damage Replacement Parts Recommendation Collision Repairs Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs Warranty on Replacement Par
26. All rights reserved The MS SOFTWARE FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as SOFTWARE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as otherwise interfacing with systems and or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers Appendices Description of Other Rights and Limitations SOFTWARE Transfer You may permanently transfer your rights under Speech Recognition f the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component s you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFT WARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressl
27. Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B Dor F Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash Note
28. Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents and provides outside air to reduce window fogging Panel Distributes air through the instrument panel vents Panel Floor Distributes air through the instrument panel vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents Floor Distributes air through the demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents Defrost Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice Touch again to return to the previous airflow selection When switched on defrost distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents to reduce window fogging J Driver settings Depending on your vehicle and option package you may have the following features Touch the and to adjust the temperature Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat if equipped Touch MyTemp to select your previously pre set temperature setpoint Touch and hold MyTemp store a new pre set for temperature setpoint Climate Control Voice Commands Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands Climate Control Commands Climate automatic Climate my temperature Climate off Climate on Climate temperature lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees Climate temperature lt 60 85 gt degrees Help 393 MyFord Touch it equipped There
29. Every 150000 miles 240000 km Replace accessory drive belt s Replace timing belt 1 6L engine Additional maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the last engine oil and filter change Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles 160000 kilometers then every three years or 50000 miles 80000 kilometers After initial inspection inspect every other oil change until replaced If not replaced within the last 100000 miles 160000 kilometers Maintenance Schedule Log Ore _ Oma aaoo Q Mut point inspection recommended CT Multi point inspection Q Mut point inspection recommended Oso i Oso i 425 Scheduled Maintenance 426 Scheduled Maintenance O Engine hours optional Q wmutepoint inspection recommended Multi point inspection recommended O Multi point inspection recommended O O Signature 427 Scheduled Maintenance 428 Scheduled Maintenance 2 a Dm O Multi point inspection recommended O O Signature 2 D o O Multi point inspection recommended O O Signature Special Operating Conditions If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions it is not necessary to
30. Help Where Am View the vehicle s current location if your vehicle is equipped with navigation If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation nothing is displayed System Information Touchscreen system serial number Your vehicle identification number VIN Touchscreen system software version Navigation system version if applicable Map database version if equipped with navigation Gracenote Database Information and Library version Sirius satellite radio ESN if activated Software Licenses View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your system Driving Restrictions Certain features are disabled when your vehicle is moving 911 Assist Turn 911 Assist on and off See Information page 382 In Case of Emergency ICE Quick Dial This feature allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access in the event of an emergency Select Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts The numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons The ICE contacts you select are presented to you at the completion of the 911 Assist call process for quick access Voice Command List View categorized lists of voice commands 355 MyFord Touch it Equipped To access Help using the voice commands press the voice button then after the tone say Help The system provides voice comm
31. Motor Oil Canada Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil U S j 290 XY 75W140 QL WSL M2C192 A XO 5W30 QSP U S XO 5W30 QFS U S CXO 5W30 LSP12 Canada CXO 5W30 LFS12 Canada WSS M2C946 A with API Certification Mark XO 5W20 QSP U S XO 5W20 QFS U S Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Ford Part Name or Ford Part Number Equivalent Ford Specification Motorcraft SAE CXO 5W20 LSP12 5W 20 Full Canada Synthetic Motor Oil CXO 5W20 LFS12 U S Canada Motorcraft SAE WSS M2C945 A 5W 20 Super and API Certification Premium Motor Oil Mark Canada Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 Synthetic Motor Oil Canada 2 0L EcoBoost engine 97 qt 9 2 L Motorcraft Orange VC 3DIL B U S coolant Antifreeze Coolant CVC 3DIL B Prediluted Canada 1 6L EcoBoost engine 8 5qt 8 L WSS M97B44 D2 coolant 2 5L engine coolant 9 2 at 8 7L Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Motorcraft ZC 32 A U S Premium Windshield CXC 37 A B D Washer Concentrate and F Canada U S WSB M8BI16 A2 Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada 291 Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Ford Part Name or Ford Part Number Equivalent Ford Specification Front wheel drive fuel 16 5 gal 62 5 L Not applicable Not applicable tank All wheel drive f
32. Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help reduce high coolant temperatures Transport Factory Displays to indicate that the vehicle is till in Transport or Mode Factory mode This may not allow some features to operate properly See your authorized dealer See Manual Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due toa powertrain malfunction MyKey Message Action MyKey Not Created Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be programmed MyKey Active Drive Displays when Mykey is active Safely Speed Limited to XX Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and MPH km h the MyKey speed limit is on Near Vehicle Top Speed Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h 100 Information Displays Message Action Vehicle at Top Speed of Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is MyKey Setting reached Check Speed Drive Displays when MyKey is active Safely Buckle Up to Unmute Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt Minder is activated Audio AdvancetTrac On Displays when a MyKey isin use and AdvancetTrac is activated MyKey Setting Traction Control On Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control is MyKey Setting activated MyKey Park Aid Cannot Displays when a MyKey is in use and p
33. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol acommon windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY WARNINGS Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNINGS When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners Keep batteries out of reach of T children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately Battery posts terminals and related T accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands afte
34. The device is not connected Make sure the device is connected to SYNC and that you have pressed play on your device SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device Your music files may not contain the proper artist song title album or genre information The file may be corrupted The song may have copy right protection which does not allow it to play Make sure that all song details are populated Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class Vehicle Health Report Services Traffic Directions and Information Issues Possible Cause s Possible Solution s received a text that the Vehicle Health Report is not activated Your account may not be activated on the website You may have the wrong VIN vehicle identification number listed 33 This is a free feature but you must first register online to use it SYNC Vehicle Health Report Services Traffic Directions and Information Issues Possible Cause s Possible Solution s Make sure that your VIN is correctly listed in your account I m unable to retrieve the report on the website or receive a system error The preferred dealer information did not load correctly When you register your account you must list a preferred dealer If one is already listed try selecting another dealer and logging out Log back
35. When an electronic error is detected a message will be displayed in the information display If this happens stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine After at least 10 seconds reset the system by restarting the engine and watch the information display for a steering message If asteering message returns or returns while driving take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving or if the ignition is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes for you to steer This occurs to prevent internal overheating and permanent damage to your steering system If this should occur you will neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and steering assist will return to normal Steering Tips If the steering wanders or pulls check for an improperly inflated tire uneven tire wear loose or worn suspension components loose or worn steering components improper vehicle alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander or pull Adaptive Learning The EPS system adaptive learning helps correct for road irregularities and improves overall handling and steering feel It communicates with the vehicle s brake sys
36. Windows Remote Open On Off Remote Close On Off Wipers Courtesy Wipe On Off Rain Sensing On Off MyKey Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey 911 Assist Always On User Selectable Traction Control Always On User Selectable Max Speed Choose desired speed or off Speed Minder Choose desired speed or off Volume Limiter On Off Do Not Disturb Always On User Selectable Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys Display Language Choose your applicable setting Units Distance Choose your applicable setting Temperature Choose your applicable setting Gauge Display Fuel Gauge Fuel Tach INFORMATION MESSAGES Note Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle not all of the messages will display or be available Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have E144636 91 Information Displays Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus information display Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time Active Park Message Action Active Park Fault Displayed when the system needs service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Adaptive Cruise Control Message Action Adaptive Cruise Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC Malfunction from engaging See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
37. You are still responsible to drive with due care and attention Note The system will store the on off setting in the information display menu through ignition cycles Note f enabled in the menu the system will be active at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h Note The system works as long as one lane marking can be detected by the camera Note f the camera is blocked or if the windshield is damaged the system may not function Note The system may not be available in poor weather or other low visibility conditions The system automatically monitors your driving behavior using various inputs including the front camera sensor If the system detects that your driving alertness is reduced below a certain threshold the system will alert you using a chime and a message in the cluster display USING DRIVER ALERT Switching the system on and off By default the system is enabled You may disable or re enable the system by selecting Setting then Driver Assist then Driver Alert in the menu When activated the system will monitor your alertness level based upon your driving behavior in relation to the lane markings and other factors System Warnings Note Note The system will not issue warnings below approximately 40 mph 65 km h The warning system is in two stages At first the system issues a temporary warning that you need to take a rest This message will only appear for a short time If the system detects
38. ae Cluster Display Control Features 04 Left Information Display Information Displays 83 General Information Information 911 Assist See TTANSMISSION eeseesecseessessesesesseseeseeeeeseees 157 Alerts General Information on Radio Calendar PreQuenCleS ccs zetia Intelligent Access Getting Assistance Outside the U S and OMY ces een 382 ef tar o le ee Getting the Services You Need as AWAY From HOM C esesssseseseeesesesseteteeseseseeeees H Hazard Warning FlaSher cccccceseeeees 226 Headlamp Exit Delay Head Restraints Adjusting the Head Restraint sy Tilting Head Restraints ccsceseseeeseeeeeees 130 440 Information Messages Active Park Adaptive Cruise Control AdvanceTrac Airbag Alarm ise Automatic Engine Shutdown Auto Start Stop Battery and Charging System Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert Syste II cestenticctaiicnniscanirniencen 96 Collision Warning System Doors and LOCKS 0 Driver Alert Engine 97 PUG onsi 98 Hill StartASsiSteta ascii cnstaccdconiaisaaien 98 Keys and Intelligent ACCESS 98 Lane Keeping System Maintenance Park Brake Power Steering Remote Start Starting System Tire Pressure Monitoring System Traction Control Transmission Installing Child Seats Child Se ats a Using Lap and Shoulder Belts 20 Using Lower Anchors
39. detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Occupant Passenger Airbag OFF Indic Passenger Airbag ator Empty Unlit Disabled Child Lit Disabled Adult Unlit Enabled Note When the passenger airbag off light Objects stowed in the seatback map is illuminated the passenger seat pocket if equipped mounted side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following Objects lodged underneath the seat Objects between the seat cushion and the center console if equipped Objects hanging off the seat back 38 Objects placed on the occupant s lap Cargo interference with the seat Other passengers pushing or pull
40. into place Lower the wiper arm and blade back to the windshield The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal position when the ignition is turned on Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER 2 5L 1 6L ECOBOOST 2 0L ECOBOOST WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed See Capacities and Specifications page 286 For EcoBoost equipped vehicles When servicing the air cleaner it is important that no foreign material enter the air induction system The engine and turbocharger are susceptible to damage from even small particles Change the air filter element at the proper interval See Scheduled Maintenance page 420 Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 250 1 6L and 2 0L EcoBoost Engines E144365 2 5L Engine um E146047 Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover Carefully lift the air filter housing cover Remove the air filter element from
41. or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors changes inroads traffic conditions or driving conditions Note When you connect the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request Further to provide the services you request and for continuous improvement the service may collect and record call details and voice communications For more information see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www SYNCMyRide com If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions do not activate or use the service SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data to give you personalized traffic reports precise turn by turn directions business search news sports weather and more For a complete list of services or to learn more please visit www SY NCMyRide com Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands 1 Press the voice button 383 2 When prompted say Services This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone Once you are connected to the servi
42. signal power battery power and roaming status of your connected phone Press OK to select and scroll to view the information When done press OK again to return to the phone status menu Set Ringer Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call one of the system s or your phone s 1 Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer 1 Ringer 2 Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer 2 Press OK to select If your phone supports in band ringing your phone s ringer sounds when Phone Ringer is chosen Message Notification Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives Press OK to select and scroll between Message Noti fication On or Message Notification Off 2 Press OK to select Modify Phonebook Modify the contents of your phone book i e add delete download Press OK to select and scroll between Add Contacts Press OK to add more contacts from your phone book Push the desired contact s on your phone See your phone s user guide on how to push contacts 310 SYNC When You Select Auto Download You Can Delete Phonebook Press OK to delete the current phone book and call history When Delete Phonebook appears press OK to confirm SYNC takes you back to the Phone Settings menu Download Phonebook Press OK to select and press OK again when Confirm Download appears Automatically download your phone book each time your phone connects to SY
43. white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds Following this wipe area dry witha clean white cotton cloth 2 CLEANING LEATHER SEATS ir EQUIPPED Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible Vehicle Care For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Dry the area with a soft cloth If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors To check for compatibility first test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing or damage to the leather CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS Note Do not use chrome cleaner metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish In
44. work your way back home Close the windows for high speed driving Drive at reasonable speeds Traveling at 65 mph 105 kph uses about 15 less fuel than traveling at 75 mph 121 kph Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size Use the recommended engine oil Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance There are also some things you may want to avoid doing because they reduce your fuel economy Avoid sudden or hard accelerations Avoid revving the engine before turning off the car Avoid long idle periods Do not warm up your vehicle on cold mornings Reduce the use of air conditioning and heat Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving Avoid carrying unnecessary weight approximately 1 mpg 0 4 kilometers liter is lost for every 400 lbs 180 kilograms of weight carried Avoid adding particular accessories to your vehicle e g bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski racks Avoid driving with the wheels out of alignment DRIVING THROUGH WATER Note Driving through deep water above the recommended levels can cause vehicle damage Note Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes Driving Hints E142667 If driving through deep or standing wat
45. 3 After at least three to five tank fill Ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons used For Metric Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARNINGS Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Fuel and Refueling Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work pr
46. 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth Michigan 48170 Attention Customer Service Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Manual French Owner s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY E142557 Customer Assistance If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar g
47. Aconnected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage battery power and signal strength The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U S Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut off which would activate 911 Assist however if 911 Assist is triggered SYNC tries to contact emergency services If a connected phone is damaged or loses connection to SYNC SYNC searches for and tries to connect to any available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911 Before making the call SYNC provides a short window of time about 10 seconds to cancel the call Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial 911 SYNC says the following or a similar message SYNC will attempt to call 911 to cancel the call press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel If the callis not cancelled anda successful call is made a pre recorded message is played for the 911 operator then the occupant s in the vehicle is able to talk with the operator Be prepared to provide your name phone number and location immediately because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically 911 Assist May Not Work If Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash The vehicle s battery or the SY
48. Audio System O CD Press to access different CD features by pressing CD then MENU See Menu Structure later in this chapter SOUND Press to adjust the sound settings for Bass Treble Balance and Fade Display screen Shows audio and SYNC information Number block Press to store your favorite radio stations when in radio mode When tuned to a station press and hold a button until sound returns When in CD mode press a button to select a track In phone mode use the buttons to dial a phone number Function buttons Press to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode i e radio or CD you are in TUNE Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments Eject Press to eject a CD Seek allows you to go to the next station up the radio frequency band or the next track on a CD End call allows you to end a phone call Cursorarrows OK Press the arrows to scroll through on screen choices Press OK to confirm the selection CD slot Insert a CD Pick up Make phone call Press to either pick up an incoming phone call or to make a phone call Seek Press to go to the next station down the radio frequency band or the previous track on a CD Play Pause Press to either play or pause a CD or MP3 track Power VOL allows you to switch the audio system on or off by pressing the button Turn the dial to adjust the volume PHONE Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system by
49. FM autoset Help If available If you have said Browse see the Browse chart later in this section If you have said Tune see the following Tune chart TUNE lt 530 1710 gt FM autoset lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt gt FM autoset preset lt gt AM FM preset lt gt AM lt 530 1710 gt FMI AM preset lt gt EMI preset lt gt AM autoset EM2 AM autoset preset lt gt FM2 preset lt gt 362 MyFord Touch i equipped TUNE lt 879 107 9 gt HD lt gt FM Preset lt gt FM lt 87 9 107 9 gt Help FM lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt gt If available SIRIUS Satellite Radio If Activated Press the lower left corner of the D touchscreen then select the SIRIUS tab When You Select You Can Presets Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas There is a brief mute while the station is being saved then sound returns when it is done ALERT Save the current song artist or team as a favorite The system alerts you when it plays again on any SIRIUS channel Replay Replay audio on the current channel You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current station If you change stations the previous audio is erased 1 Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or
50. If You Select You Can 2 Follow the directions in your phone s user guide to put your phone into discovery mode A six digit PIN appears in the display 3 When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC 4 When Setas Primary Phone appears press OK Scroll to toggle between Yes and No then press OK 5 Depending on the functionality of your phone you may be asked additional questions i e if you would like to download your phonebook Scroll and use OK to select your responses Connect Bluetooth Device Connect a previously paired Bluetooth enabled phone Only one device can be connected at a time When another phone is connected the previous one is discon nected Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones 2 Scroll until the desired device is chosen then press OK to connect the phone Set as Primary Phone Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone Press OK to confirm SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle When a phone is selected as primary it appears first in the list and is marked with an Set Bluetooth On Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off When the desired selection is chosen press OK Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates all Bluetooth f
51. Life Monitor that determines when the engine oil needs to be changed based on how your vehicle is used By using several important factors in its calculations the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time This means you do not have to remember to change the oil on a mileage based schedule the vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED in the information display The following table is intended to provide examples of vehicle use and its impact on engine oil change intervals It is provided as a guideline only Actual engine oil change intervals depends on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message Miles kilometers Vehicle use and example Normal 7500 10000 12000 16000 Normal commuting with highway driving No or moderate load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling Severe 5000 7499 8000 11999 Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation 3000 4999 Extreme 4000 7999 Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation Scheduled Maintenance At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display Change engine oil and filter Rotate the tires P
52. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall D D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire E 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Inflating Your Tires Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required Wheels and Tires At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patte
53. OK to connect the device Set Bluetooth On Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off When the desired selection is chosen press OK Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates Bluetooth features Delete Device Delete a paired media device Press OK and scroll to select the device Press OK to confirm Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired devices Press OK to select Return Exit the current menu This is a speed dependent feature Advanced Menu Options 2 Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK then press OK 1 Press AUX and then MENU to enter 3 Scroll until Advanced appears the Media menu 4 Press OK and then scroll to select from When You Select You Can Prompts Have SYNC guide you by asking questions helpful hints or ask you for a specific action 1 Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or off 327 SYNC When You Select You Can 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Languages Choose from English Fran ais or Espa ol The displays and prompts are in the selected language 1 Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display 3 If you change the language sett
54. OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Africa U S Virgin Islands Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS amp GLOBAL INITIATIVES 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 For customers in Guam the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands CNMI America Samoa and the U S Virgin Islands please feel free to call our Toll Free Number 800 841 FORD 36
55. Press OK to select Scroll to select the desired genre then press OK Access your playlists from formats such as ASX M3U WPL or MTP The system lists your playlists alphabetic ally in flat file mode If there are more than 255 they are organized into alphabetical categories Press OK to select Scroll to select the desired playlist then press OK 325 SYNC When You Select You Can Tracks Search for and play a specific track which has been indexed SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more than 255 SYNC automatically organizes them into alphabetical categories Press OK to select Scroll to select the desired track then press OK Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your media device connected to the USB port You can only view media content which is compatible with SYNC other files saved are not visible Press OK to select Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive Similar Music Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB port The system uses the metadata information of each song to compile a playlist for you Press OK to select The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins playing The metadata tags must be populated for this feature to include each track With certain playing devices if your metadata tags are not populated the tracks won t be available in voice recognition play menu o
56. SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel No Signal Loss of signal from the The signal is currently being SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS blocked When you move tower to the vehicle into an open area the signal antenna should return Updating Update of channel No action required The programming in progress process may take up to three minutes Call SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 Satellite service has been deactivated by SIRIUS Satellite Radio Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to reactivate or resolve subscription issues No Channels Available All the channels in the selected category are skipped or locked Using the channel guide unlock or unskip the chan nels Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your vehicle No action required 117 Climate Control MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL E144491 A Fan speed control Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off If you switch the fan off the windshield may fog up Light bars on the dial illuminate to indicate fan speed A C Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Power Press the button
57. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected then press OK 4 When Find SYNC appears in the display press OK 5 Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode See your phone s user guide if necessary 6 When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display The display indicates when the pairing is successful The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to set the current phone as the primary phone the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start up download your phone book etc PHONE Call lt name gt Go to privacy Call lt name gt at home Hold Call lt name gt at work Join Call lt name gt in office Menu Call lt name gt on mobile OR cell Call lt name gt on other Phone book lt name gt n2 Phone book lt name gt at home SYNC PHONE n2 n2 Call history incoming Phone book lt name gt at office Call history missed Phone book lt name gt at work Call history outgoing Phone book lt name gt on mobile OR cell u2 n2 Connections Phone book lt name gt on other Dial These commands do not require you to say Phone first These commands are not available until phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth See Dial table below See Menu table bel
58. Sensitivity High Normal Low Distance Alert On Off Warn On default on key cycle Off Cruise Control Adaptive default on key cycle or Normal Cross Traffic On default on key cycle Off Driver Alert On default on key cycle Off Hill start On Off 89 Information Displays Settings cont d Driver Lane Keeping System Mode Alert Aid Both eid Intensity High Normal Low Front Park Aid On default on key cycle Off Rear Park Aid On default on key cycle Off Vehicle Auto Engine Off On default on key cycle Off Easy Entry Exit On Off Lighting Auto Highbeam Autolamp Delay Off or XX Seconds Locks Autolock On Off Autounlock On Off Mislock On Off Remote Unlocking All doors Driver s door Oil Life Reset Set to XXX Settings cont d Vehicle Remote Start Climate Control using Heater A C Auto cont d this feature allows you Last Settings to select different climate control modes when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature Front Defrost Auto Off Rear Defrost Auto Off Driver Seat Auto Off Passenger Seat Auto Off Duration 5 10 15 minutes Quiet Start On Off System Enable Disable 90 Information Displays Settings cont d Vehicle Switch Inhibit On Off cont d
59. Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible Exterior Chrome Note Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface Note Do not use chrome cleaner metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers Vehicle Care Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding that which is recommended Using other non recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage Underbody Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts Use only approved products to clean plastic parts For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a s
60. THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU AS IS NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER Gracenote 2007 Appendices FCC ID KMHSYNCG2 IC 1422A SYNCG2 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
61. The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How Fail Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat the engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area and The coolant temperature E warning light will illuminate indicator will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine The service engine soon When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However The engine power will be limited The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage Maintenance When Fail Safe Mode Is Activated WARNINGS Fail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in asafe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power power steering assi
62. USB port Bluetooth audio Stream audio from your phone Line in Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack Cancel Cancel the requested action SYNC Return to the main menu Voice settings Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback Vehicle health report Run a vehicle health report Services Access the SYNC Services portal Mobile apps Access mobile applications Help Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode If equipped U S only These commands can be said at any time during a voice session Main menu List of commands What can I say Next page Previous page Go back Cancel Exit Help 342 MyFord Touch i equipped Accessing a List of Available Commands Command List Using the touchscreen press the 2 Using the steering wheel control press Settings icon Help then Voice the voice icon After the tone speak your command clearly Available Voice Commands Audio list of commands Radio list of commands Bluetooth audio list of commands SD card list of commands Browse list of commands Sirius satellite list of commands CD list of commands Travel link list of commands Climate control list of commands USB list of commands List of commands Voice instructions list of commands
63. When You Select You Can Presets Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas There is a brief mute while the station is being saved then sound returns when it is done HD Radio Turn the feature on This enables you to receive radio broadcasts digitally where available providing free crystal clear sound Scan Go to the next strong AM or FM radio station Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP if equipped Occupancy Mode if equipped and Speed Compensated Volume settings Set PTY for Seek Scan allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for and then choose to either seek or scan for the stations RDS Text Display allows you to always view the inform ation broadcast by FM stations by selecting On 357 MyFord Touch if equipped When You Select You Can Auto Presets AST allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest stations in your current location TAG Button if available allows you to tag a song to download later When you select On TAG appears on screen when HD Radio is active You can press TAG to save the information of the song that is playing When you plug in your portable music player the information is transferred if supported by your device When you are connected to iTunes the tags appear to remind you of the songs you would like to down
64. an authorized dealer to have your vehicle serviced The system does not look for a space The traction control system may be off The system does not offer a particular space Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space The vehicle is farther than 5 ft 1 5 m from the parking space The vehicle is closer than 16 in 40 cm from neighboring parked vehicles The transmission is in R Reverse the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space Parking Aids The system does not position the vehicle where want in the space The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission i e rolling forward when R Reverse is selected The transmission is in R Reverse the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle properly Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly i e not inflated correctly improper size or of different sizes A repair or alter
65. and Tethers for CHildren LATCH Using Tether Straps Instrument Cluster Instrument Lighting Dimmet 006 Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps gi Interior LAaAMpS ss sesssssossenonrssnnerroennernnnnrenener Front Interior Lamp Rear Interior Lamp Interior Luggage Compartment Auto Dimming Mirror Introduction 44 Jump Starting the Vehicle Connecting the Jumper Cables JUMP Starting Preparing Your Vehicle Removing the Jumper Cables 227 Keyless Entry siiscs scnnncicnniacacicss 55 SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY Keyless Starting Automatic Engine Shutdown Fast Restart MOVIN innan n aana Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is SEARO GUY vsraccesscnnsncerznnsxennaninvmsisvarernknrexekininns 144 Switching the Ignition On Accessory IASI R E A A Keys and Remote Controls Knee Air DaQ eeesecessecseseesesessesesseseessseesesseeneees L Lane Keeping SYStOM cceeseseseeseseees 193 Switching the System On and Off 193 Lighting Control Headlamp Flasher High Beams ifelphdigleteeerereresterecrerereteetereermereeeereeeeeerrerrertre Load Carrying Load Limit Vehicle loading with and without a trailer Index Locking ANd UNlOCKING ccccecsesseseseeseeteees Activating Intelligent Access Autolock Feature Auto Relock Battery Saver Illuminated Entry Illuminated Exit Lugga
66. and lamps will turn off when the hazard control button is pressed the panic button if equipped is pressed on the remote entry transmitter or your vehicle runs out of power Spin out Detection If a spinout is detected and the hazard warning flashers come on the message Spinout Detected Hazards Activated will appear on the instrument cluster Once the hazard warning flashers have been activated they can be turned off by pressing the hazard warning flasher button pressing the remote control unlock button pressing the remote control panic button cycling the ignition on and off twice DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS WARNINGS Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag module Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child ina child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back a z e E151127 The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal collisions The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of Driver and passenger airbag modules Front passen
67. and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes After the engine has been restarted and the AWD system has adequately cooled the warning message will turn off and normal AWD function will return 163 Do not use a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided If the mini spare tire is installed the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components This condition will be indicated by a warning in the information display See Information Messages page 91 If there is a warning message in the information display from using the spare tire this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and cycling the ignition off and on It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive or damage the AWD system Driving In Special Conditions With All Wheel Drive AWD AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the highway Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Basic operating principles in special conditions Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can aff
68. any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself 8 5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect 8 6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement As used in this Agreement the words include and including and variations thereof will not be deemed to be terms of limitation but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words without limitation 9 Other Vendors Terms and Conditions The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users This Agreement includes end user terms applicable to these companies included at the end of this Agreement and thus your use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions which are applicable to TeleNav s third party vendor licensors NavTeq End User License Agreement END USER TERMS The content provided Data is licensed not sold By opening this package or installing copying or otherwise using the Data you agree to be bound by the terms of this agree
69. are closed The doors will lock again the horn will chirp and the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed Locks Note f any door or the luggage compartment is not closed or if the hood is not closed on vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm or remote start the horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash This feature can be enable or disabled in the information display See General Information page 83 Opening the Luggage Compartment 7AA Press twice within three seconds 2x to open the luggage compartment Make sure the luggage compartment is closed and latched before driving your vehicle An unlatched luggage compartment may cause objects to fall out or block your view Activating Intelligent Access i Equipped Intelligent access can be switched off with the key free feature in the information display See General Information page 83 The intelligent access key must be within 3 feet 1 meter of the vehicle Ata Door Pull an exterior door handle The door will unlock and can be opened E157085 Touch the top of the door handle to lock the vehicle At the Luggage Compartment E144402 Press the exterior release button hidden above the license plate Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead Transmitter This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you op
70. are additional climate control commands but in order to access them you have to say Climate first When the system is ready to listen you may say any of the following commands CLIMATE A C off Maximum fan Temperature A C on Minimum fan Temperature lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees Automatic My temp Temperature lt 60 85 gt degrees Defrost off Off Temperature decrease Defrost on On Temperature high Dual off Panel off Temperature increase Fan decrease Panel floor on Temperature low Fan increase Panel on Windshield floor on Floor off Rear defrost on Windshield off Floor on Rear defrost off Windshield panel on MAX A C off Recirc off Windshield panel floor on MAX A C on Recirc on Help If you say Temperature you can then say any of the commands in the following chart TEMPERATURE lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees lt 60 85 gt degrees High Low Help 394 MyFord Touch i equipped NAVIGATION Note The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate the navigation system If you need a replacement SD card see your authorized dealer Note The SD card slot is spring loaded To remove the SD card just push the card in and release it Do not attempt to pull the card out to remove it this could cause damage Your navigation system is comprised of two mai
71. assumes any risk associated with the use of the DEVICE UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip CD ROM disk s or via web download or other means and is labeled For Upgrade Purposes Only or For Recovery Purposes Only you may install one 1 copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE asa replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE anduse it in accordance with this EULA including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE are owned by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY or their affiliates or suppliers The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties This EULA grants you no rights to use such content All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COM
72. available when a navigation route is active If you say Destination you can then say any command in the following Destination chart If you say Navigation you can then say any command in the following Navigation chart DESTINATION lt nametag gt lt POI category gt Favorites Home Intersection Nearest lt POI category gt Nearest POI Play nametags POI category Previous destination Street address Help 402 MyFord Touch if equipped NAVIGATION Destination Zoom city Zoom country Zoom minimum Zoom maximum Zoom state Zoom province Zoom street Zoom to lt distance gt Help If you say Destination you can then say any command in the Destination chart One shot Destination Street Address If your vehicle is equipped with the SD card navigation feature you have the ability to enter in a street address using a feature called one shot street address When you say either Navigation destination street address or Destination street address the system asks you to say the full address The system displays an example on screen You can then speak the address naturally such as One two three four Main Street Anytown 403 Appendices END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SYNC End User License Agreement EULA You hav
73. bent Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNINGS Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving The head restraint is a safety device 1y Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied Seats WARNINGS Install the head restraint properly to help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision Note Adjust the seat back to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible Make sure that you remain comfortable If you are extremely tall adjust the head restraint to its highest position Front seat and rear seat outboard head restraints E138642 Rear center head restraint E138645 The head restraints consist of A An energy absorbing head restraint B Two steel stems C Guide sleeve adjust and unlock button D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button Adjustin
74. button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card press the voice button and after the tone say USB or SD card then any of the following commands MyFord Touch if equipped USB or SD CARD Browse Play podcast episode lt name gt Next Play similar music Pause Play song lt name gt Play Play TV show episode lt name gt Play album lt name gt Play video lt name gt Play all Play video podcast episode lt name gt Play artist lt name gt Play video playlist lt name gt Play audiobook lt name gt Previous Play author lt name gt Repeat all Play composer lt name gt Repeat off Play folder lt name gt Repeat one Play genre lt name gt Shuffle Play movie lt name gt Shuffle off Play playlist lt name gt What s this Play podcast lt name gt Help If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card the system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse When prompted see the following Browse chart These commands are only available in USB mode and are device dependent BROWSE Album lt name gt All video podcasts All albums n All videos All artists Artist lt name gt All audiobooks Audiobook lt name g
75. ccesscsseeseseees 193 Blind Spot MONItOL ececceestesesteseesesseeesees 196 STCOLING eceeceesesesssssssesssssesessesessssssseseseeesesees 201 Load Carrying OAC tsnena 202 Towing TOWING a Trail r i eeecceestesestesesteseeseeseseens Recommended Towing Weights n Essential Towing CHeCKS cccseseseceseees Transporting the Vehicle Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 214 Driving Hints Br AKiNG IN c escsssesesessesestssessesesseseseeseseesesees 216 Economical DIiVing cccscsceseseseseseseseees 216 Driving Through Watel ccesesesesseseeseseees 216 Floor Matinni 217 Customer Assistance Getting the Services You Need 219 In California U S Only cscs 220 The Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program U S Onlly cccscseeeees 221 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Program Canada Only 221 Getting Assistance Outside the U S ang C 222 Table of Contents Ordering Additional Owner s Lit r TUL ees eeeeceeteceseeesseeeeseeeeseeeesteseeeeeee 223 Reporting Safety Defects U S ON eteeeeee reer eeenresreeeercermetene near eerereereaerees 223 Reporting Safety Defects Canada ONY eases seis ihre Ses eet 224 Roadside Emergencies Roadside Assistance 225 Hazard Warning Flashers we 226 Fuel Cut Off SWItCH essences 226 Jump Starting the Vehicle 226 Fuses CHANING a FUS Esiin 229 Fuse Specification Chart 229 Maintenance General Information Openin
76. ceseesesseesesseeseesesseessesseeseeneesesees VOICE COMO ls ssissssssseecdecsecssesscsscseasesseaccacanel Cruise Control Information Display ControOl ccseseee 63 Wipers and Washers Windshield WiDers cccccscesessseseseseseeseeees 65 Table of Contents AUTOWIDCIS eccsessesesessesesesesesseeseseseseeseseeesesees 65 Windshield WaSNETS sssecsecsessecsessesssesseens 66 Lighting Lighting CONTIOL escssesestesesteseseseeeseeneeee 67 AUtOLAMPS cccccccsessessessssestesestesessesesesesseeseesees 67 Instrument Lighting Dimmet 006 68 Headlamp Exit Delay ccceeesseseeseeeeeees 68 Daytime RUNNING LAMPS 68 Automatic High Beam Control a Front Fog Lamps mii Direction INGICAtOLS c cccseeseesessesseesseeesseees Interior LAMPS cccceesesesseesesesestetesesteseseseeee 70 Windows and Mirrors Power WINCOWS ccsesessessssessessesessssecssseesesnees 72 Exterior MirtOrs ives 8ssisssssierstsssne bine 73 Interior MIrrOK cesssesesssesesessseesssssesesseeseeesees 74 SUA VISOMSissciscscis0 05sss RHEE RRREE ee 75 MO ONO Of vss sessessssvssssvssesezszeseszcezszeszizcezteeseiesticedes 75 Instrument Cluster GAUSS E E E EET 77 Warning Lamps and Indicators 79 Audible Warnings and Indicators 82 Information Displays General INFOrMatiOn c ccccsceseceseseseeseseees 83 Information M SSABES cccsceceeseseseeesees 91 Audio System General INFOrmation
77. conditions The maximum engine off time is exceeded When you press the Auto StartStop button while the engine is stopped automatically Either the front defroster is turned to the MAX setting or the rear defroster is turned on Any of the following conditions may result in an automatic restart of the engine The blower fan speed is increased or the climate control temperature is changed An electrical accessory is turned on or plugged in Disabling Auto StartStop E146362 Press the Auto StartStop button located onthe center console to switch the system off The button will illuminate The system will only be deactivated for the current ignition cycle Press the button again to restore Auto StartStop function 149 Fuel and Refueling SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNINGS Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel capless fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which
78. cycle or Off Rear Park Aid On or Off Hill Start On or Off Assist Cross Traffic On or Off Vehicle Auto Engine Off Fuel History 5 10 or 30 minutes Lighting Auto Highbeam Autolamp Delay Off or XX Seconds Settings cont d Vehicle Locks Autolock cont d Autounlock Relock Mislock Remote Unlock All Doors Driver First Oil Life Rest Set to XXX Switch Inhibit Windows Remote Open Remote Close Wipers Courtesy Wipe Rain Sensing MyKey Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey 911 Assist Always On User Selectable Traction Always On User Selectable Control Max Speed Choose desired speed or Off 85 Information Displays Settings cont d Speed Minder Choose desired speed or Off Volume On or Off Limiter Do Not On or Off Disturb Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys Display Language Choose your applicable setting Units Distance Choose your applicable setting Temperature Choose your applicable setting Information Display Controls Type 3 E144638 Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu Press the right arrow button to enter a sub menu Press the left arrow button to exit a menu Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display escape button Press
79. discs it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create While various files may be present files with extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension are played other files are ignored by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer home computer and your in vehicle system In track mode the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files are played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system only plays the mp3 files in the current folder AUDIO UNIT VEHICLES WITH AM FM CD SYNC SATELLITE RADIO WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving Note Depending on your vehicle option package your system may look different than what is shown Note Some features such as SIRIUS satellite radio may not be available in your location Check with your authorized dealer E144488
80. download later When you are on an acquired HD Radio station the TAG button is available provided the feature has been turned on To use the tag feature MyFord Touch if Equipped Press AM or FM gt Options gt TAG Button gt On When you hear a song you like touch TAG The system automatically saves the song s information and transfers it to your portable music player if supported when it is connected to the 4 When you access iTunes with your portable music player the tags appear to you as areminder The system allows you to tag up to approximately 100 songs For a list of devices that support tagging see www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca system If your music player is connected at the time the system automatically transfers the tag to your player and a pop up confirms the transfer When HD Radio broadcasts are active you can access the following functions When You Select You Can Scan Hear a brief sampling of all available stations This feature still works when HD Radio reception is activ ated although it does not scan for HD2 HD7 channels You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast To save a multicast station When the channel is active on screen press and hold a as a preset memory preset slot until the sound returns There is a brief mute then the sound returns signifying it was saved When recalling a HD2 or HD3 mem
81. engaged If the parking brake is not engaged this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction Have the system checked immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING A Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop your vehicle Have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury Cruise Control it equipped It will illuminate when you switch this feature on Direction Indicator Illuminates when the left or right amp turn signal or the hazard warning flasher is turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb See Changing a Bulb page 252 Door Ajar Q Displays when the ignition is on 4 and any door is not completely closed Electric Park Brake It will illuminate or flash when the electric parking brake has a malfunction Engine Coolant Temperature Illuminates when the engine E coolant temperature is high meee Stop the vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let cool Engine Oil If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are driving this indicates a malfunction Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off Check the engine oil level See Engi
82. ensure that your transmission is not damaged Front wheel drive FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider All wheel drive AWD vehicles cannot be towed with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted 215 Driving Hints BREAKING IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles 480 kilometers During this time your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early Do not labor the engine Do not tow during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers ECONOMICAL DRIVING Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive the conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel economy Accelerate and slow down ina smooth moderate fashion Drive at steady speeds Anticipate stops slowing down may eliminate the need to stop Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving When running errands go to the furthest destination first and then
83. extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle Sometimes a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped E142534 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1inch 2 5 centimeters of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with aNHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a Certified Passenger Seat Technician 22 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH WARNINGS Never attach two child safety seats tothe same anchor Ina collision one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depend
84. focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving When using SYNC Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and cables where they cannot be stepped on or interfere with the operation of pedals seats compartments or safe driving abilities Do not leave playing devices in the vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage See your device s user guide for further information Do not attempt to service or repair the system See your authorized dealer Privacy Information When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently Among other things this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book text messages read and unread and call history including history of calls when your cellular phone was not connected to the system In addition if you connect a media device the system creates and retains an index of supported media content The system also records a short develop
85. for service Displayed as a reminder to press the brake and clutch while starting the vehicle Press Clutch to Start Displayed as a reminder to press the clutch in while starting the vehicle Cranking Time Exceeded Key Program Successful Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start the vehicle Displayed during spare key programming when an intelligent access key is programmed to the system 98 Information Displays Message Key Program Failure Action Displayed during spare key programming when an intelligent access key has failed to be programmed Max Number of Keys Learned Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been programmed Not Enough Keys Displayed during spare key programming when not enough Learned keys have been programmed Key Battery Low Replace Displays when the key battery is low Change the battery as Soon soon as possible Could Not Program Integrated Key Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing keys Engine On Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle and the engine is on Lane Keeping System Message Action Lane Keeping Sys The system has malfunctioned Contact your authorized Malfunction Service dealer as soon as possible Required Front Camera Tempor arily Not Available The
86. has been switched off or on See Using Traction Control page 172 Spinout Detected Hazards Activated Displays when a spinout has occurred and the hazard are activated Transmission Message Action Transmission Malfunc tion Service Now See your authorized dealer Transmission Over heating Stop Safely The transmission is overheating and needs to cool Stop ina safe place as soon as it s possible Transmission Overtem perature Stop Safely The transmission has overheated and needs to cool Stop in a safe place as soon as it s possible Transmission Service Required Transmission Too Hot Press Brake See your authorized dealer Transmission is getting hot Stop to let it cool 104 Information Displays Message Transmission Limited Function See Manual Transmission Warming Up Please Wait Action Displays when the transmission has overheated and has limited functionality See Automatic Transmission page 158 Transmission is too cold Wait for it to warm up before you drive Transmission Not in Park Displays as a reminder to shift into park Transmission Adjusted Displays when the transmission has adjusted the shift strategy Transmission Adapt Mode Displays when the transmission is adjusting the shift strategy Transmission Indicate Mode Lockup On Displays when the transmission shift lever is locked and unable
87. inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law Letter rating Speed rating mph km h 81 mph 130 km h 87 mph 140 km h 99 mph 159 km h 106 mph 171 km h 112 mph 180 km h 118 mph 190 km h 124 mph 200 km h 130 mph 210 km h 149 mph 240 km h lt ZX C aAly wm va O 2Z2 lt Letter rating Speed rating mph km h W 168 mph 270 km h Y 186 mph 299 km h Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR H U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 A
88. information on the service engine soon indicator See Warning Lamps and Indicators page 79 Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container WARNINGS Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the capless fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others Note Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle When filling the vehicle s fuel tank froma portable fuel container use the funnel included with the vehicle 1 Locate the portable funnel that comes with your vehicle Pig E157279 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the capless fuel system 157280 3 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 4 When done clean the funnel or properly dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel Fuel and Refueling FUEL CONSUMPTION Note The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling y
89. is ata complete stop before you shift into R Reverse Failure to do so may damage the transmission 1 Press the clutch pedal to the floor to disengage clutch 2 Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least three seconds before shifting into R Reverse 3 Shift into R Reverse by raising the collar below the gearshift knob up then moving the lever fully to the left then forward Transmission E99067 Note The gearshift lever can only be moved to R Reverse by raising the collar below the gearshift knob up before shifting to reverse This is a lockout feature which protects the transmission from accidentally engaging R Reverse when intending to select 1 First If R Reverse is not fully engaged press the clutch pedal down and return the gearshift to the neutral position Release the clutch pedal for a moment then raise the collar and shift to R Reverse again Parking Your Vehicle WARNING Do not park your vehicle in Neutral it may move unexpectedly and injure someone Use 1 First gear and set the parking brake fully To park your vehicle 1 Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position 2 Fully apply the parking brake hold the clutch pedal down then shift into 1 First 3 Turn the ignition off AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn
90. keep the audible warning on If the front end of the vehicle is hit or damaged the radar sensing zone may be altered causing missed or false collision warnings See your authorized dealer to have your collision warning radar checked for proper coverage and operation LANE KEEPING SYSTEM WARNING The system is designed to aid the driver It is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment The driver is still responsible to drive with due care and attention A Note The system needs to be activated by the driver at each key cycle Note The system works above 40 mph 64 km h Note The system works as long as one lane marking can be detected by the camera Note f the camera is blocked or if the windshield is damaged the system may not function Note When Aid mode is on and the system detects no driver steering activity for a short continuous period of time the system alerts the driver to put their hands on the steering wheel The system may detect a light grip touch on the steering wheel as hands off driving The system detects unintentional drifting toward the outside of the lane and alerts and or aids the driver to stay in the lane through the steering system and instrument cluster display The system automatically detects and tracks the road lane markings using a camera that is mounted behind the interior rear view mirror Switching the System On and Off Note The system defaults
91. maintain interior comfort To recharge the battery WARNINGS The engine may restart T automatically if required by the system Switch the ignition off before opening the hood or performing any maintenance Failure to do so may result in serious injuries due to automatic engine restart Always switch the ignition off before leaving your vehicle as the system may have turned the engine off but the ignition will still be on and automatic restart may occur The Auto StartStop system status is available at a glance within the information display See Information Displays page 83 Enabling Auto StartStop The system is automatically enabled every time you start your vehicle if the following conditions are met The Auto StartStop button is not pressed not illuminated Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed of 3mph 4km h after the vehicle has been initially started Your vehicle is stopped Your foot is on the brake pedal The transmission selector lever is in position D There is adequate brake vacuum The interior compartment has been cooled or warmed to an acceptable level The front windshield defroster and rear window defroster are off The steering wheel is not turned rapidly or is not at a sharp angle The vehicle is not on a steep road grade The battery is within optimal operating conditions battery state of charge and temperature in range The engine coolant is at operati
92. map positioning This icon may be intermittently displayed under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access ar Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn onthe Quick touch Buttons list When in map mode touch anywhere on the map display to access the following options When You Select You Can Select a scrolled location on the map as your destination You may scroll the map by pressing your index finger on the map display When you reach the desired location simply let go and then press Set as Dest Set as Dest Set as Waypoint Set the current location as a waypoint Save to Favorites Save the current location to your favorites POI Icons On Off Select POI icons to be displayed on the map Up to three icons can be selected for display on the map at the same time Cancel Route Cancel the active route View Edit Route Access these features when a route is active View route Edit destination waypoints Edit turn list Detour Edit route preferences Edit traffic preferences Cancel route 400 MyFord Touch if Equipped Navigation Map Updates Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership by calling 1 3O0 NAVMAPS in Mexico call 01 800 557 5539 or going to www navigation com ford You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available AAY
93. not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects or to detect parked vehicles people animals or infrastructure fences guardrails trees etc It is designed to alert the driver to vehicles in the blind zones Note When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind zone typically fewer than two seconds the system does not trigger Using the Systems BLIS turns on when the engine is started and the vehicle is driven forward above 5 mph 8 km h it remains on while the transmission is in D Drive and N Neutral If shifted out of D Drive or N Neutral the system enters cross traffic alert mode Once shifted back into D Drive BLIS turns back on when the vehicle is driven above 5 mph 8 km h Note BL S does not function in R Reverse or P Park or provide any additional warning when a turn signal is on Note Cross traffic alert detects approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet 14 meters away though coverage decreases when the sensors are blocked Reversing slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness Note For manual transmission vehicles CTA will be active only if the transmission is in Reverse If the vehicle is rolling backwards and the transmission is not in Reverse then CTA will not be active WARNING To help avoid personal injury NEVER use the cross traffic alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before
94. on during cold weather and cooled devices during hot weather 128 Seats SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNINGS Sitting improperly out of position or T with the seat back reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a collision Always sit upright against your seat back with your feet on the floor Do not recline the seat back as this can cause the occupant to slide under the safety belt resulting in serious injury in the event of a collision Do not place objects higher than the T seat back to reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of a collision or during heavy braking Max 30 E68595 When you use them properly the seat head restraint safety belt and air bags will provide optimum protection in the event of a collision We recommend that you follow these guidelines Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible Do not recline the seat back more than 30 degrees Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible Make sure that you remain comfortable Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel We recommend a minimum of 10 inches 25 centimeters between your breastbone and the air bag cover Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly
95. on the keypad to save personal code 1 3 56 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal entry code has been programmed To program additional personal entry codes repeat Steps 1 3 then for Step 4 press 3 4 to save personal code 2 press 5 6 to save personal code 3 press 7 8 to save personal code 4 press 9 0 to save personal code 5 You may also program a personal entry code through the MyFord Touch system if equipped See Settings page 347 Tips Do not set a code that uses five of the same number Do not use five numbers in sequential order The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Recalling Memory Positions If Equipped The programmed entry codes will recall driver memory positions as follows Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory positions Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory positions Entry code 3 will recall driver 3 memory positions Note Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not recall memory positions Erasing a Personal Code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Press and release 1 2 on the keypad within five seconds Press and hold 1 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 3 Locks All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti Scan Feature The keypad will go into an anti scan mode if the wrong code has been entere
96. or wording on the headliner or roof pillar trim A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow side air curtain deployment ys Crash sensors and monitoring N system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 41 Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the back seats The side curtain airbags will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because itis designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The design and development of the side curtain airbags included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side curtain airbags CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle 1 Al The vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the Restraints Control Module which deploys activates the front safety belt pretensioners driver airbag passenger airbag knee airbag s
97. page Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise Available cannot function properly See Using Adaptive Cruise Control page 184 Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual Cruise Control Auto matic Braking Turned Off Front Sensor Not Aligned Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve See Using Adaptive Cruise Control page 184 Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging Adaptive Cruise Driver Resume Control Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver Adaptive Cruise Speed Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the Too Low to Activate adaptive cruise Adaptive Cruise Shift Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting Down the gap distance and the driver needs to shift the transmission into a lower gear 92 Information Displays AdvanceTrac Message Action Service AdvanceTrac Displays when the system detects a malfunction due toa blocked sensor AdvanceTrac Off On Displayed when the traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver Airbag Message Action Occupant Sensor Displays when the system detects a malfun
98. parts or their packaging Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner s Manual Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications Collision Repairs We hope that you never experience a collision but accidents do happen Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit finish structural integrity corrosion protection and dent resistance During vehicle development we validate these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts Introduction Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty For additional information refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Manual that is provided to you along with you
99. plan you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits such as Rental reimbursement Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires Roadside Assistance benefits There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental Ford Extended Service Plan ESP When you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan you receive added peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers The Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers Note Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage This information is subject to change For more information visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www ford ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you 297 SYNC GENERAL INFORMATION Powered by Microsoft E142598 SYNC is an in vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone and portable media player This allows you to Make and receive calls Access and play music from your portable music player
100. rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury Gew Gw E143819 GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR 206 Load Carrying Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the w
101. remove the cables to prevent vehicle damage Remove the cables when they are no longer needed Do not use cables on dry roads If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables please contact your authorized dealer CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL WARNINGS The use of tire sealants may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should not be used However if you must use a sealant the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer See Tire Pressure Monitoring System page 262 If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Note The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Wheels and Tires Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensors See Tire Pressure Monitoring System page 262 Replace the spare tire witha road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect
102. returns to the full cool position This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient AUTO Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system automatically adjusts fan speed air distribution A C operation and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature Heated rear window Turns the heated rear window on and off See Heated Windows and Mirrors page 126 Defrost Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and de mister vents This setting can also be used to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice MAX Defrost Press to switch on Outside air is distributed through the windshield air vents air conditioning is automatically turned on the fan is automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position When MAX defrost is on recirculated air cannot be selected to prevent fogging The heated rear window is automatically switched on when MAX defrost is selected 122 Climate Control AUTOMATIC CLIMATE Note You can switch temperature units CONTROL between Fahrenheit and Celsius See Settings page 347 A awm em B Er CLIMATE K wm Tye wae C SOURCE VOL SOUND J ok fa By rune ac D A 4 amp Dp Temp CS mm CE T T H G F E144494 A AUTO Press the button to
103. s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving Acomplete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated Transmission MANUAL TRANSMISSION Using the Clutch Note Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floo
104. seat back C a lever to adjust the height of the seat D a lever to adjust the angle of the seat back POWER SEATS f eouippPep WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver s seat or seat back when your vehicle is moving Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seat back before returning it to the original position fa s ia E144632 E E i Power Lumbar it Equipped MEMORY FUNCTION rEQuiPPeD a WARNINGS 4 a Before activating the seat memory gt make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are y clear of moving parts Do not use the memory function me when your vehicle is moving E144633 This feature will automatically recall the position of the driver s seat and power mirrors The memory control is located on the driver s door 132 Seats E142554 Saving a Pre Set Position 1 Switch the ignition on 2 Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to your desired position 3 Press and hold the desired pre set button until you hear a single chime Up to three pre set memory positions may be saved A memory pre set may be saved at any time Recalling a Pre Set Position Press and release the pre set button associated with your desired driving position The seat and mirrors will move to the position stored for that pre set Note A pre set memory position can only be recalled when the ignition is off or when the t
105. shifts for you in the event that your engine speed is running at too high or to low an RPM Note Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held without shifting Brake Shift Interlock WARNINGS Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working When doing this procedure you will be taking the vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely To avoid unwanted vehicle movement always fully set the parking brake prior to doing this procedure Use wheel chocks if appropriate If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer Note See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used Note For some markets this feature will be disabled Use the brake shift interlock lever to move the gearshift lever from the park position in the event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead battery Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition off before performing this procedure L E155984 1 Remove the side panel on the right side of the gearshift lever E155985 2 Locate the access hole Transmission E155983 3 Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole and press the lever foreword while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park position and into the N Neutral position
106. slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight Additional information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing is located in another chapter of this manual See Load Limit page 202 You can also find the information in the RV amp Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Note Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration listed in the chart below Note Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area Do not exceed 20 fee 1 86 meters Note For high altitude operation reduce the gross combined weight by 2 per 1000 feet 300 meters starting at the 1000 foot 300 meter elevation point Note Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight as the vehicle s electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to activate electric trailer brakes Towing Your vehicle may tow a Class trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is ess than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart Powertrain Maximum Trailer Weight lb kg 1 6L GTDI 1000 454 2 0L GTDI 2000 907 2 5L TiIVCT 1000 454 211
107. steering wheel is being turned Engine On due to Steering Wheel Maneuv ering The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned Engine On due to Accessory Usage Engine may be On to support high demand for electrical accessories such as operating power windows rear defroster or when using the Power point Engine On Normal Oper ation Engine On to support normal vehicle operation Includes external vehicle conditions such as altitude traffic low ambient temperature Also includes battery outside optimal operating conditions state of charge and temperature and inadequate brake vacuum can occur if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession Heating or Cooling Engine On to achieve or maintain interior compartment at an acceptable level Power Outlet in Use Engine On required to support use of Power Outlet 110V Automatic Engine Shutdown Message Action Engine Shuts Off in XX Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off Seconds Engine Shut Off for Fuel Displays when the engine has shut off to help increase fuel Economy economy Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds Press Ok to Override Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to override the shut down 94 Information Displays AWD Message Action AWD Temporarily Displayed w
108. switch between the high beams and the low beams Note This is a temporary override and the system will return to automatic operation after a short period To permanently deactivate the system use the information display menu or turn the lighting control switch from autolamps to headlamps FRONT FOG LAMPS Ff c uippeD E142453 Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control isin any position except off and the high beams are not on 70 DIRECTION INDICATORS t E145595 Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators Note Jap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change INTERIOR LAMPS The lamps will switch on when one of the following conditions have been met You open any door You press a remote control button You touch switch A on the front interior lamp Front Interior Lamp Note The front interior lamp switches are on the overhead console The exact location of each switch on the overhead console depends upon which roof sunroof and window shade features are equipped on the vehicle Lighting Note Jouch switch C to switch the door function off when you open any door The indicator lamp will illuminate amber when the door function is off When the door function is off and you open a door the courtesy and door lamps will st
109. that would like to avoid on planned navigation routes Phone Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Phone then select from the following Phone Bluetooth Devices Connect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a favorite Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth on and off Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside the vehicle With this feature turned on text message notifications are also suppressed and do notring inside the vehicle 911 Assist Turn 911 Assist on and off See Information page 382 Phone Ringer Select the type of notification for phone calls ring tone beep text to speech or have it be silent 352 MyFord Touch i equipped Text Message Notification Phone Select the type of notification for text messages alert tone beep text to speech or have it be silent Internet Data Connection If compatible with your phone you can make adjustments to your internet data connection Select to make your connection profile with the PAN personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to make adjustments to your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press for additional information Manage Phonebook Access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as de
110. the amateur radio antennas in the area of the driver s side hood Any non Ford custom electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle 294 Ford Extended Service Plan ESP SERVICE PLANS U S only More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford Extended Service Plan It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your dealer for details J PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered 2 ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items 3 BaseCare Covers 84 components 4 PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U S and Canada It is the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get Reliable quality service anywhere you go Factory trained technician
111. the drive away release feature will operate Drive as normal using the accelerator and clutch pedals and the electric parking brake will be automatically released The brake system warning lamp will go off to confirm that the electric parking brake has been released Note The electric parking brake drive away release makes starting on a hill easier This feature will release the parking brake automatically when the vehicle has sufficient drive force to move up the hill To assure drive away release when starting uphill press the accelerator pedal quickly Battery With No Charge WARNING You will not be able to apply or release the electric parking brake if the battery is low or has no charge If the battery is low or has no charge use jumper cables and a booster battery 171 Traction Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction If your vehicle begins to slide the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and when needed reduces engine power at the same time If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction USING TRACTION CONTROL In certain situations e g stuck in snow or mud turning the traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full engine power Turn off the traction control system through the information displa
112. the light turns onanda short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the tire pressure monitoring system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle When you Believe your System is not Operating Properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required warning light Solid warning light Tire s Under inflated 1 Make sure tires are at the proper pres sure See Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 32 km h before the li
113. the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels and other features please visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN You need your ESN to activate modify or track your satellite radio account The ESN is found on the System Information Screen SR ESN XXXXXXXXXXXX To access your ESN touch the bottom left corner of the touchscreen Touch SIRIUS Options then ESN SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting Antenna obstructions Terrain Potential Reception Issues For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute ence Satellite radio signal interfer Your display may show ACQUIRING to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute 365 MyFord Touch if equipped Troubleshooting Tips Radio Display Acquiring Cause Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the select
114. the steering wheel and when prompted say Vehicle health report Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice When you run a Vehicle Health Report Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number to process your report request and diagnostic information about your vehicle Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information Ford may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www SYNCMyRide com See www SYNCMyRide com Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement for more information CLIMATE Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your climate control features Depending on your vehicle line and option package your climate screen may look different than what is shown here MyFord Touch it Equipped E146187 A Power Touch to turn the climate control system on and off When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle B Passenger settings Touch DUAL to switch passenger side temperature controls on and off Touch the and to adjust the temperature Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat if equipped C Fan speed Touch or to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in your vehicle D Recirc
115. the voice commands that are Street Address available while viewing this screen are Destination Destination my home Destination street address Destination favorites Destination previous destinations Destination POI Destination intersection Destination emergency If you choose Street Address from the lt Street Name navigation screen you can choose from State Prov the following Some of the voice commands that are Number available while viewing this screen are City Street Address Enter house number Change house number Enter street name Change street name Enter city Change city Enter state Change state 345 MyFord Touch if equipped If you choose Points of Interest from the ATM navigation screen you can choose from All Restaurants the following Search Area Search By Name Fuel Station Accommodations Parking Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are Points of Interest or POI Destination lt POI category name gt Search by name Search by category Change search area Change state Note These are just a sample of the voice City commands available within the Points of Interest section the categories themselves State Prov are also technically voice commands Some of the voice commands that are If you
116. to bring your vehicle to a safe stop 3 When your vehicle has stopped move the transmission selector lever to position P and switch the ignition off Starting and Stopping the Engine WARNING Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance The steering will not lock but higher effort will be required When the ignition is switched off some electrical circuits warning lamps and indicators may also be off A Fast Restart The fast restart feature allows you to restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching it off even if a valid key is not present Within 20 seconds of switching your vehicle off press the brake pedal and press the start button After 20 seconds have expired you can no longer start your vehicle without the key present inside the vehicle Once your vehicle has started it remains running until you press the start button even if a valid key has not been detected If you open and close a door while your vehicle is running the system searches for a valid key You cannot be able to start your vehicle if a valid key is not detected within 20 seconds Automatic Engine Shutdown Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically shuts down the engine if it has been idling for an extended period of time The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power Before the engine shuts down a message appears in
117. to access the display indicates there is no media If there into the USB port and is turned on are media files you have the following options to scroll through and select from When You Select You Can Play All Play all indexed media tracks from your playing device in flat file mode one at a time in numerical order Press OK to select The first track title appears in the display Artists Sort all indexed media by artist Once selected the system lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically If there are fewer than 255 indexed artist they are listed alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more they are categorized in alphabetical categories 1 Press OK to select You can select to play All Artists or any indexed artist 2 Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and press OK Albums Genres Playlists Sort all indexed media by albums If there are fewer than 255 indexed albums they are listed alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more they are organized into alphabetical categories 1 Press OK to enter the album menu and select from playing all albums or from any individual indexed album 2 Scroll until the desired album is chosen then press OK Sort indexed music by genre category type SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more than 255 SYNC automatically organizes them into alphabetical categories
118. to arm the alarm Disarming the Alarm Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control or keyless entry keypad Switch the ignition on or start the vehicle Use a key in the driver s door to unlock the vehicle then switch the ignition on within 12 seconds Note Pressing the panic button on the remote control will stop the horn and signal indicators but will not disarm the system Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving Note Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position See Sitting in the Correct Position page 129 eye A Volume up B Volume down C Mute D Media E Seek down or previous F Seek up or next MEDIA E157083 Press repeatedly to scroll through available Unlock the steering column Audio Sources 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position Seek Next or Previous Press the seek button to tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset play the next or the previous track Press and hold the seek button to tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band seek through a track 3 Lock the steering column E157084 AUDIO CONTROL iF couippeD You can operate the following functions with the control 62 Steering Wheel VOICE CONTROL wir equipped Type 2
119. to off each time the vehicle is started unless a MyKey is detected If a MyKey is detected the system is defaulted to on and the Alert mode is automatically selected Driving Aids Note f a MyKey is detected pressing the button will not affect the on off status of the system Only the Mode Sensitivity and Intensity settings can be changed when a MyKey is present To turn the system on press the amp button located on the left i steering wheel stalk The button must be pressed each time the vehicle is started The system can be turned off by pressing the button again System Settings The system has three optional setting menus available To view or adjust them select Settings gt Vehicle Settings gt Driver Assist gt Lane Keeping Sys in the left hand instrument cluster display using the OK button on the steering wheel The last known selection for each of these settings is stored by the system You do not need to readjust your settings each time you turn on the system Mode This setting allows the driver to select which of the system features will be enabled and turned on when the button is pressed Alert only Provides a steering wheel vibration when an unintended lane departure is detected Aid only Provides a steering input toward the lane center when an unintended lane departure is detected Both Alert Aid Intensity This setting affects the intensity of the steering wheel vibratio
120. to talk with the operator Be prepared to provide your name phone number and location immediately because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically SYNC 911 Assist May Not Work If Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash The vehicle s battery or the SYNC system has no power The phone s paired and connected to the system was thrown from the vehicle 911 Assist Privacy Notice Once 911 Assist is set on it may disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not turn the feature on Vehicle Health Report WARNING Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions regularly inspect your vehicle and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect Vehicle Health Report supplements but cannot replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system i e brake lining wear Failure to perf
121. turn on fully automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system automatically adjusts fan speed air distribution A C operation and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature B CLIMATE Press to turn the climate control system on and off When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle C MAX A C Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full cool position Recirculated air is distributed through the instrument panel air vents air conditioning is automatically turned on the fan speed is automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool position This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient D A C Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes Use A C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency E Recirculated air Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When recirculated air is selected the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may also reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C to red
122. unblocked feres with state once the rainfall or the radar snowfall rate decreases or signals stops Do not use BLIS or cross traffic alert in these conditions System Limitations The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems do have their limitations situations such as severe weather conditions or debris build up on the sensor area may limit vehicle detection The following are other situations that may limit the BLIS Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone The following are other situations that may limit the cross traffic alert system Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph 24 km h 200 Driving in reverse faster than 5 mph 8 km h Backing out of an angled parking spot False Alerts Note f a trailer is connected to the vehicle the BLIS system may detect the trailer causing a false alert You may want to turn the BLIS off manually There may be certain instances when either the BLIS or cross traffic alert systems illuminate the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone this is known as a false alert Some amount of false alerts are normal they are temporary and self correct System Errors If either system senses a problem with the left or rig
123. under the following conditions Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating The camera s view is obstructed by mud water or debris Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged causing the camera to become misaligned To access any of the rear view camera system settings make the following selections in the touch screen when the transmission is not in R Reverse Menu gt Vehicle gt Rear View Camera After changing a system setting the touch screen shows a preview of the selected features Guidelines and the Centerline Note Active guidelines and fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note The centerline is only available if Active or Fixed guidelines are on Parking Aids E142436 A Active guidelines B Centerline C Fixed guideline Green zone D Fixed guideline Yellow zone E Fixed guideline Red zone F Rear bumper Active guidelines are only shown with fixed guidelines To use active guidelines turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path If the steering wheel position is changed while reversing the vehicle might deviate from the original intended path The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position The active guidelines are not shown when the steering wheel position is straight Alw
124. used when the engine is not running the battery will discharge There may be insufficient power to restart your engine Note Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Note Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Note Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow Note Do not use the power point for operating a cigar lighter element Note mproper use of the power point can cause damage not covered by your warranty Note Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point To prevent the battery from being discharged Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Locations Power points may be found in the front of the center console inside the center console storage bin on the rear of the center console 110 Volt AC Power Point if equipped WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point since it will defeat the safety protection design Doing so my cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond t
125. visor you want to program and the hand held transmitter button until the indicator light on the visor changes from flashing slowly to rapidly then release 4 Press and hold the function button you programmed for 5 seconds then release YoU may need to do this twice to activate the door If your garage door does not operate observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on programming is complete Press and release the programmed button to activate the door If the indicator light on the visor flashes rapidly for two seconds then turns toa constant light follow the steps below Note You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens 1 Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor Note You will have 30 seconds to complete the next step 2 Return to your vehicle E142659 Tt E142658 3 Press and hold the function button you want to program on the visor for 2 seconds then release Repeat this step Depending on the brand of garage door opener you may need to repeat this sequence a third time To program additional buttons repeat steps one through four For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing the Function Button Codes Note You cannot erase individual buttons ew E142660 1 Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 secon
126. voice settings You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system You can change these settings at any time Adjusting the Interaction Level Push the voice icon Say Voice us settings when prompted then any of the following When You Say The System Interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and more tone prompts Interaction mode standard Provides more detailed interaction and guidance The system defaults to the standard interaction mode Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request For example the system may ask Phone is that correct When You Say The System Confirmation prompts off Makes a best guess from the command you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings Confirmation prompts on Clarifies your voice command with a short question 301 SYNC The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command When turned on you may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification For example say Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home Say 2 after the tone to
127. when the vehicle is moving WARNINGS Applying the electric parking brake while moving will result in use of the anti lock braking system Do not use the electric parking brake system when the vehicle is moving unless the normal brake system is unable to stop the vehicle Brakes WARNINGS With the exception of emergency conditions for example the brake pedal does not work or is blocked do not apply the electric parking brake while the vehicle is moving On bends or poor road surfaces or weather conditions emergency braking can cause the vehicle to skid out of control or off the road If you apply the electric parking brake when your vehicle is moving the brake system warning lamp will illuminate and a warning chime will sound See Information Displays page 83 If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph 6 km h the braking force is applied as long as the switch is pulled Releasing or pressing the switch or pressing the accelerator pedal will stop the braking force Releasing the electric parking brake E147231 You can release the electric parking brake either manually by pressing the switch or automatically Manual release WARNING If the brake system warning light remains illuminated or flashes after you have released the parking brake there could be a problem with you braking system Have the system checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible You can manually release the el
128. with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible Tire Change Procedure WARNINGS When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission selector lever is in position P To help prevent your vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure to place the transmission selector lever in position P set the parking brake and block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNINGS Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack If your vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle If using a jack other than the one provided as original equipment with your vehicle make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight including any vehicle cargo or modifications Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Park ona level surface set the parking brake and activate th
129. 0 High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The following drawings compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips Child Safety HRK E142596 E142597 A D If the booster seat slides on your vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as INSTALLING CHILD SEATS shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat x may improve this condition Do not Child Seats introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions E142594 19 Child Safety Use a child safety seat Sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat for infants toddlers or children weighing 40 pounds 18 kilograms or less generally age four or younger Using Lap and Shoulder Belts WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a childina child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in fro
130. 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire Replacement Requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNINGS Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as Wheels and Tires WARNINGS possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommendedtires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When m
131. 2846 36 Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision KNEE AIRBAG The driver s and passenger s knee airbags are located under the instrument panel The system works along with the driver s and passenger s front airbags to help reduce injury to the legs When the airbags activate in a collision the knee airbags deploy from under the instrument panel As with front and side airbags it is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury e Make sure the knee airbags are N operating properly See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 41 FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM WARNINGS Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained ina rear seating position Sitting improperly out of position or 1y with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Supplementary Restraints System WARNINGS To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket if equipped or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger se
132. 432 Scheduled Maintenance ee Oma aao Q wutepoint inspection recommended Multi point inspection recommended O sions O O sions O Ormen Oana e Q Muti point inspection recommended CT Multi point inspection Q Muti point inspection recommended CT Oso i Oso i California fuel filter replacement If the Exceptions vehicle is registered in California the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life Ford Motor Company however urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service There are some exceptions your Normal Scheduled Maintenance 433 Scheduled Maintenance Hot climate oil change intervals Vehicles operating in the Middle East North Africa Sub Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute API Certified for Gasoline Engines Certification mark oil of SM or SN quality the normal oil change interval is 5000 miles 8000 kilometers If the available API SM or SN oils are not available then the oil change service interval is 3000 miles 4800 kilometers Engine Coolant Change Log O Erone nours optioned sd O Erone rour opto sd hours optional Engine air filter and cab
133. 73 FAX 313 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Customer Assistance Ford International Business Development Inc Customer Relationship Center P O Box 11957 Caparra Heights Station San Juan Puerto Rico 00922 1957 Telephone 800 841 FORD 3673 FAX 313 390 0804 Email prcac ford com www ford com pr If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center P O Box 21470 Dubai United Arab Emirates Telephone 971 4 3326084 Toll Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia 800 8971409 Local Telephone Number for Kuwait 24810575 FAX 971 4 3327299 Email menacac ford com www me ford com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations amp Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office Customers in the U S should call 1
134. Braking System Auto Start stop Battery Blind Spot Monitor Brake SYStOM L v csccccsssesesessssessssssesssssessseesssceseesees 79 Cruise Control Direction Indicator Door Ajar Electric Park Brake ead Engine Coolant TeMperature ccscseeeeees 80 Engine Oil Fasten Safety Belt iD Front Airbag Front Fog Lamps Heads Up Display High Beam Lane Keeping Aid Low Fuel Level Low Tire Pressure Warning Parking LAMPS Powertrain Fault Service Engine Soon Stability Control 82 Stability Control Off 82 Trunk Ajar Washer Fluid Che ck ccesceseeesteesteseeneeee 248 Washers See Cleaning the Exterior Wheels and Tires Technical Specifications Windows and Mirrors Windshield Washers Windshield Wipers Intermittent Wipe Speed Dependent Wipers Wipers and Washers 446
135. Delete the message Calendar Delete All messages This screen displays any system messages i e SD card fault 388 MyFord Touch i Equipped 911 Assist If Equipped WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to acrash the system will not dial for help which could delay response time potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash the system or phone may be damaged or non functional Always place your phone in a secure LAN location in the vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a collision Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly Note The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident Note Before setting this feature on ensure that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information Note f 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user that setting applies for all paired phones If 911 Assist is turned off either a voice message plays or a display message icon comes on or both when the vehicle is started after a previousl
136. Do not use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel and Refueling Easy Fuel Capless Fuel System WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury When fueling your vehicle 1 Putthe vehicle in P Park and turn the ignition off 2 Open the fuel filler door d 4 a a ha lt a E156032 3 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system and leave the nozzle fully inserted to open both doors until you are done pumping Hold handle higher during insertion for easier E A DIA wr N E154765 4 After you are done pumping fuel slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle allow about five to ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle Note A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below and in front of the fuel filler door If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear on the instrument cluster At the next opportunity do the following 1 Safely pull off the ro
137. E142656 Navigation Voice Commands When in navigation mode press the voice button on the steering us wheel controls After the tone say any of the following commands Rotate the map view by swiping your finger across the shaded bar with the arrows Navteq is the digital map provider for the navigation application If you find map data errors you may report them directly to Navteq by going to http mapreporter navteq com Navteq evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e mail Navigation System Voice Commands Cancel next waypoint n3 Navigation Cancel route Repeat instruction n2 Destination Show 3D Destination lt nametag gt Show heading up Destination lt POI category gt Show map Destination favorites Show north up Destination home Show route Destination intersection Destination nearest lt POI category gt Show turn list Voice off Destination nearest POI Voice on Destination play nametags Voice volume decrease Destination POI Voice volume increase 401 MyFord Touch if equipped Navigation System Voice Commands Destination POI category Where am Destination previous destination Zoom in Destination street address Zoom out Detour Help These commands are only
138. ETTINGS Press to select any of the following Clock Display Sound Vehicle Settings Help INFORMATION Press to select any of the following Services Travel Link Alerts Calendar Apps PHONE Press to select any of the following Phone Quick Dial Phonebook History Messaging lt Settings NAVIGATION Press to select any of the following My Home Favorites Previous Destinations Point of Interest Emergency Previous Starting Point Latitude Longitude Street Address Intersection City Center Map Edit Route Cancel Route Freeway Entrance Exit ENTERTAINMENT MyFord Touch if equipped Press to select any of the following AM FM SIRIUS CD USB BT Stereo SD Card A V In CLIMATE Press to select any of the following Driver Settings Recirculated Air Auto Dual Passenger Settings A C Defrost HOME Press to access your home screen Depending on your vehicle s option package and software your screens may vary in appearance from the screens shown in this section Your features may also be limited depending on your market Check with your authorized dealer for availability Using the Touch Sensitive Controls on Your System To turn a feature on and off just touch the graphic with your finger To get the best performance from the touch sensitive controls Make sure your hands are clean and dry Since the touchscreen operates based on the touch of a finger you may have trouble using it if you are
139. Estadistica y Geografia TERMS AND CONDITIONS License Limitations on Use You agree that your license to use this Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal noncommercial purposes and not for service bureau timesharing or other similar purposes Except as otherwise set forth herein you agree not to otherwise reproduce copy modify decompile disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data and may not transfer or distribute it in any form for any purpose except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws License Limitations on Transfer Your limited license does not allow transfer or resale of the Data except on the condition that you may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if a you retain no copies of the Data b the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement and c you transfer the Data in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the original media e g the CD ROM or DVD you purchased all original packaging all Manuals and other documentation Specifically Multi disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof Additional License Limitations Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NT ina separate written agreement and without limiting the preceding paragraph your license is conditioned on use of the Data as prescrib
140. INFRINGEMENT Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you Disclaimer of Liability NT AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS INJURY OR DAMAGES DIRECT OR INDIRECT WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT REVENUE CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY EVEN IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations so to that extent the above may not apply to you Export Control You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with and with all licenses and approvals required under applicable export laws rules and regulations including but not limited to the laws rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U S Department of Commerce and the Bure
141. ION WARNING SYSTEM ir Equipped WARNINGS This system is designed to bea supplementary driving aid It is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment or the need to apply the brakes This system does NOT activate the brakes automatically Failure to press the brake pedal to activate the brakes may result in a collision The collision warning system with brake support cannot help prevent all collisions Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed Note The system does not detect warn or respond to potential collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of the vehicle Note The collision warning system is active at speeds above approximately 5 mph 8 km h jow o om This system is designed to alert the driver of certain collision risks A radar detects if your vehicle is rapidly approaching another vehicle traveling in the same direction as yours EN E156131 If it is a red warning light illuminates and an audible warning chime sounds The brake support system assists the driver in reducing the collision speed by charging the brakes If the risk of collision further increases after the warning light illuminates the brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking This may be apparent to the driver The system does not automatically activate the brakes but if the brake pedal is pressed full force braking is applied ev
142. L EcoBoost 243 Adding Engine Oil csceseesesesseseeseseeseeee 243 Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring SYSTOM secrete E E 244 Engine Oil Dipstick 1 6L ECOBOOST e E 243 Engine Oil Dipstick 2 5L 2 0L 0 101011 1 C A 243 Engine Specifications Drivebelt Routing 439 Entertainment A V Inputs AM FM Radio Bluetooth Audio Browsing Device Content SD Card Slot and USB Port SIRIUS Satellite Radio If Activated joonissari iaaa 363 Supported Media Players Formats and Metadata INformatiOn ceceseseecteeees 373 EPB See Electric Parking Brake 169 Essential Towing Checks Before Towing a Trailer Hitches Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Person Watercraft PWC Safety Chains Trailer Brakes Trailer Lamps When Towing a Trailer Event Data Recording See Data Recording Export Unique Options Exterior Mirrors Auto Dimming Feature Blind Spot Monitor Fold Away Exterior Mirrors Heated Exterior Mirrors Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors Memory Mirrors Power Exterior Mirrors Signal Indicator Mirrors F Fastening the Safety Belts Restraint of Pregnant Women Safety Belt Extension Assembly Safety Belt Locking Modes Floor Mats enamn 217 Fog Lamps Front See Front Fog LAMPS 70 Ford Credit U S Only Index Ford Extended Service Plan ESP 295 Heated SQ AatSiscscszesceszsscsscsssccsssxescssastcce
143. N 65 WARNING Some constituents of engine exhaust certain vehicle components certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules safety belt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal For more information vist Web Address www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate FORD CREDIT U S Only Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit thank you for your business For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us as well as help manage your account Phone 1 800 727 7000 For more information regarding Ford Credit as well as access Account Manager please go to www fordcredit com REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford FOMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the
144. NC Downloading times are phone dependent and quantity dependent Press OK to select When Auto Download On appears press OK to have your phonebook automatically down loaded each time When auto download is on any changes additions or deletions saved since your last download are deleted Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every time your phone connects to SYNC Your phonebook call history and text messages can only be accessed when your specific phone is connected to SYNC Return Exit the current menu System Settings This menu provides access to your Bluetooth Devices Menu Options 1 Press the phone button to enter the Phone menu Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu features Use the arrow buttons to scroll 2 Scroll until System Settings appears through the menu options then press OK The Bluetooth Devices menu allowsyou 3 Scroll until Bluetooth Devices to add connect and delete devices set a appears then select OK phone as primary as well as turn your 4 Scroll to select from the following Bluetooth feature on and off options The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts languages defaults perform a master reset install an application and view system information If You Select You Can Add Bluetooth Device Pair additional phones to the system 1 Press OK to select then again when Find SYNC appears in the display 31 SYNC
145. NC system has no power The phone s paired and connected to the system was thrown from the vehicle 911 Assist Privacy Notice Once 911 Assist is set on it may disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not turn the feature on Vehicle Health Report if equipped WARNING Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions regularly inspect your vehicle and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect Vehicle Health Report supplements but cannot replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system i e brake lining wear Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury Note This feature is only available in the United States MyFord Touch i equipped Note Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to r
146. ONAN CE eeeseeeeseeseseeteseeteeeeeetesteeteeeees 32 Child Safety 14 General Information Child Safety Locks Left Hand Side Right Hand Side 25 Child Seat Positioning 16 Cleaning Leather Seat 258 438 Cleaning Products cccscessssesscsesesesteseeseees 255 Cleaning the Alloy WheelsS cccee 259 Cleaning the Engine cscsecsessseseseseees 256 Cleaning the Exterior 255 Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts 256 Exterior Chrome 255 Underbody 256 Cleani Instrument Cluster LENS cceeees 258 Cleaning the INte rir ccceesesessesseseeeeeee 257 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper BAG OS E EE EAE 257 Clearing All MyKeys 30 Climate iisi 391 Climate Control Voice Commands 393 Climate COntrOl cecsessesesseseseseseseseseeseeses 118 Coolant Check See Engine Coolant Check 2 5L 1 6L EcoBoost 2 0L EcoBOoSt 244 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator 4 Creating a MYKeY ccceseesesseseseseeeeeseseeeeee 49 Programming Changing Optional OU A E A EE 50 Cruise Control 03 Principle of Operation Cruise Control See USING Cruise Control 183 Customer ASSISTANCE ccceeseseeeeeeeseeeees 219 Data RECOMMINSii s202 sisi cteercenecceneveacs 9 Event Data Recording Service Data Recording Daytime Running Lamps Direction INCICAtOSS cesesesesseseeseseeseeeees 70 Driver Ale
147. PANY third party software and service providers their affiliates and suppliers Use of any on line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form you may print one copy of such electronic documentation EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U S and European Union export jurisdiction You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For additional information see http www microsoft com exporting Appendices TRADEMARKS This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation third party software or service providers their affiliates or suppliers PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates or subsidiaries For product support please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICE Should you have any questions concerning this EULA or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason please refer to the a
148. RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter 419 Scheduled Maintenance General Maintenance Information Why Maintain Your Vehicle Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established based upon rigorous testing It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times These intervals serve two purposes one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning the vehicle down It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is performed an
149. S INCLUDING IN EACH CASE BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE SOME STATES AND OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU Appendices 6 Arbitration and Governing Law You agree that any dispute claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara California The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction Note that there is no j
150. Safety belts and seats can become hot ina vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided The safety belt system consists of Lap and shoulder safety belts Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode except driver safety belt Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions Safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions Belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position Safety belt warning light and chime N Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator Safety Belts The safety belt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts when activated In frontal and near frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners may be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags The pretensioners may also activate when a side curtain airbag is deployed FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS The front outboard and rear s
151. THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXTPNT XX RC XX DSO we TINTTR TIPPS R TAXLE TTR SPR XXXXX XXX XX XX XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX E142478 The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar the door latch post or the edge of the door near the door latch next to the driver s seating position Capacities and Specifications TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLI XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXX XAXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX kPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXX xX EXT PNT XX RC XX mS we TINTTR TIPPS TR TAXLE TTR SPR XXXXX XXX XX X XX _XJXX XXX AXXXXXXXXXXXX XV XXXX XXXXXXX XX The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission des
152. The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print In the interest of continuous development we reserve the right to change specifications design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted stored ina retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission Errors and omissions excepted Ford Motor Company 2012 All rights reserved Part Number 20120706212512 Table of Contents Introduction About This Manual esessessecessessessesseeseenees 7 Symbols Glossary Data Recording s ia California Proposition 65 0 0 TI P rCHlOLate ecsecsessessesssessessesseseeseeseeseeseeseeneees 1 Ford recline R NS 1 Replacement Parts RECOMMENCALION ccsecsesseesesseeseesseeseeseees 1 Special NOtices ccccccccsescssesessesessesesseseeneees 12 Mobile Communications EQUIPMENT serana n 12 Export Unique OPtiONns c ceeeeseseeeseseees 13 Child Safety General INFOrMatiOn ccscssseceseseseseees 14 Child Seat Positioning cece 16 BOOSLEr SCat Sissi irrisa 17 Installing Child S ats cesses 19 Child Safety LOCKS cccccscsssssestesesteseeteseeeeees 25 Safety Belts Principle Of Operation 26 Fastening the Safety Belts 27 Safety Belt Height Adjustment 29 Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator RINE E eee een ree eee 30
153. Towing ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1000 miles 1600 kilometers Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer Refer to your scheduled maintenance information If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions the rental agency gives yOu Load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle s load can be found in another chapter of this manual See Load Limit page 202 Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of the vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight Hitches Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle Distribute the trailer load so 10 15 of the total trailer weight is on the trailer tongue Safety Chains Note Never attach safety chains to the bumper Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes WARNING Do not c
154. Traffic On Route Identify traffic incidents on your route nearby your vehicle s current location or near any of your favorite places if Traffic Nearby programmed Fuel Prices View fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle s location or on an active navigation route Movie Listings available View nearby movie theaters and their show times if Weather View the nearby weather current weather or the 5 day forecast for the chosen area Select Map to see the weather map which can show storms radar information charts and winds Select Area to select from a listing of weather locations Sports Info progress View scores and schedules from a variety of sports You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access The score automatically refreshes when a game isin Ski Conditions View ski conditions for a specific area 386 MyFord Touch if equipped SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands Press the voice button on the us steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK 5 day weather forecast Fuel prices Movie listings Sports headlines Sports schedules Sports scores Traffic Weather Weather map Help If you say Sports headlines Sports schedules or Sports scores you can then say any of the commands in the following chart Sports related C
155. Wheel pilot bore Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles 285 Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Engine 1 6L EcoBoost engine 2 0LEcoBoost engine 2 5L engine Cubic inches 98 122 152 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Minimum 87 octane Minimum 87 octane Compression 10 0 1 93 1 9 7 ratio Spark plug gap 0 027 0 031 in 0 70 0 027 0 031 in 0 049 0 053 in 0 80 mm 0 70 0 80 mm 1 25 1 35 mm 7 2 0L and 2 5L engines Drivebelt Routing pan 1 6L engine A Da 9 Ga Wa S T a E142480 Ga A Long drivebelt is on first pulley E142479 groove closest to engine B Short drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine MOTORCRAFT PARTS Component 1 6L EcoBoost Engine 2 0L EcoBoost Engine 2 5L Engine Air filter FA 1912 element Oil filter FL 9105 Battery BXT 96R 500 BXT 96R 590 286 Capacities and Specifications Component 1 6L EcoBoost Engine 2 0L EcoBoost Engine 2 5L Engine Spark plugs SP 532 SP 527 SP 530 Cabin air filter FP 71 Windshield WW 2700 driver side wiper blade WW 2601 passenger side Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used Only use the specifie
156. ad 2 Putthe vehicle in P Park and turn the ignition off 3 Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening 4 Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle several times to allow the inlet to close properly This will dislodge any debris preventing the inlet from sealing If this action corrects the problem the message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city or highway driving Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components Fuel and Refueling If you have run out of fuel You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal With keyless ignition just start the engine Crank time will be longer than usual Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8 liters of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and ona steep grade more than gallon 3 8 liters may be required The service engine soon indicator may come on For more
157. adlamps or parking lamps on Parking Brake On Warning Chime Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately Information Displays GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel Corresponding information is displayed in the information display Information Display Controls Type 1and Type 2 E144637 Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu Press the right arrow button to enter a sub menu Press the left arrow button to exit a menu Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display escape button Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages You can access the menu using the information display control Note Some options may appear slightly different
158. afety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts E142587 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle aA p E142588 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle Restraint of Pregnant Women WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also follow this practice See the following figure E142590 Safety Belts Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest Safety Belt Locking Modes WARNINGS After any vehicle collision the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked
159. age cost review handicap access hours of operation and website address For hotels cityseekr can provide information such as star rating price category review check in out times hotel service icons and website address Setting Your Navigation Preferences Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your route Press the Settings icon gt Thy Settings gt Navigation MyFord Touch it equipped When You Select You Can Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off Choose how you want to view the turn list top to bottom or bottom to top Set the automatic parking POI notification When parking POI notification is on parking POI icons display on the map when you get close to your destination This may not be very useful in dense areas and may clutter the map if other POls are also set for display Route Preferences Avoid freeways toll roads ferries and car trains when planning your route Use HOV lanes if available and have the system always select the shortest distance fastest time or most economical route Navigation Preferences Choose prompts to be either voice or tone only Have the system automatically fill in the state and province based on the information already entered into the system Traffic Preferences Choose how you want the system to handle traffic prob lems along your route Automatic Have the system reroute you
160. airbag and seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator lamp will be unlit and stay unlit Supplementary Restraints System If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the airbag off indicator lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat back in the full upright position Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to
161. all history text messages and paired devices 1 Press OK to select and then press OK again when Restore Defaults appears in the display 2 Press OK to confirm Master Reset Install Application Completely erase all information stored on SYNC phonebook call history text messages and paired devices and return to the factory default settings Press OK to select The display indicates when complete and SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Install applications you have downloaded Press OK and scroll to select Press OK to confirm Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired phones and all information originally saved with those phones Press OK to select System Info Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number 313 SYNC If You Select Press OK to select You Can MAP Profile This is a Bluetooth component which can further help your phone with the exchange of text messages Return Exit the current menu WARNINGS SYNC APPLICATIONS AND Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an SERVICES iF equippep emergency call if you can do it In order for the following features to work your cellular phone must be compatible with SYNC To check your phone s compatibility visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca SYNC Services if equipped U S only Provides access to traffic directions and information such as trav
162. ally programmed you must first erase the current settings See Erasing the function button codes later in this section E142657 The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the driver s sun visor 136 The system includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home As well as being programmed for garage doors the system transmitter can be programmed to operate entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting Additional system information can be found online at www homelink com or by calling the toll free help line on 1 800 355 3515 Programming Note Put a new battery in the hand held transmitter This will ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Note During programming the hand held transmitter may stop transmitting If this occurs press and hold the function button on the visor while you press and release the hand held transmitter every two seconds The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the radio frequency signal is accepted E142658 1 Switch the ignition on 2 Hold the garage door hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 2 8 centimeters away from the button you want to program Universal Garage Door Opener 3 Press and hold both the button on the
163. an accident or other serious consequences Keep User s Guide in vehicle When kept in the vehicle the User s Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive based system Please make certain that before using the system for the first time all persons have access to the User s Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully Appendices WARNING Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your attention away from the road and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences Do not change system settings or enter data non verbally using your hands while driving Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations This is important since while setting up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away fromthe road and remove your hands from the wheel General Operation Voice Command Control Functions within the Windows Automotive based system may be accomplished using only voice commands Using voice commands while driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel Prolonged Views of Screen Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention Even occasional short sca
164. ance However in cold or inclement weather conditions the automatic high beam system s availability may be decreased If the driver wants to change the beam state independently of the system the driver may turn the high beams ON or OFF using the multifunction switch lever Automatic control will resume when conditions are correct Note Modification of the vehicle ride height e g using much larger tires may degrade feature performance A camera sensor is centrally mounted behind the windscreen of the vehicle and monitors conditions continuously to decide when to switch the high beams off and on Once the system is active the high beams will switch on if The ambient light level is low enough that high beams are needed There is no traffic in front of the vehicle The vehicle speed is greater than 25 mph 40 km h The high beams will switch off if An approaching vehicle s headlights or a preceding vehicle s tail lamps are detected Vehicle speed falls below 16 mph 25 km h The ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not required Severe rain snow or fog is detected The camera is blocked Activating the system Switch onthe system using the information display and autolamps See Information Displays page 83 See Autolamps page 67 E142451 Lighting Turn the lighting control to the autolamps position Manually overriding the system t E130140 Use the lever to
165. ance performance for uphill climbs hilly terrain or mountainous areas This will increase engine RPM during engine braking Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy Gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds SelectShift Automatic Transmission if Equipped Your SelectShift automatic transmission gives you the ability to manually change gears if you d like To use SelectShift move the gearshift lever into S Sport 159 E142629 If equipped with the toggle on the gearshift lever Press the button to upshift Press the button to downshift If equipped with steering wheel paddles Pull the right paddle to upshift Pull the left paddle to downshift E144821 Note After you have assumed manual control with SelectShift your vehicle will remain in this mode until you return the gearshift lever from S Sport back to D Drive Upshift to the recommended shift speeds according to the following chart Upshifts when accelerating recom mended for best fuel economy Shift from 15 mph 24 km h 25 mph 40 km h 1 2 2 3 Transmission Upshifts when accelerating recom mended for best fuel economy 3 4 40 mph 64 km h 45 mph 72 km h C se S0mpn 60K The instrument cluster will display the selected gear that you are currently in SelectShift will automatically make some
166. and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote Gracenote End User License Agreement ULA This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville California 94608 Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote s providers If so all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote Appendices You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content Gracenote Sof
167. andard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise When you start the engine avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine IGNITION SWITCH E72128 O off The ignition is off Note When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle do not leave your key in the ignition This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge Note 70 switch the engine off when your vehicle is moving move the transmission selector lever to position N Use the brakes to bring the vehicle to a safe stop After your vehicle has stopped switch the engine off and move the transmission selector lever to position P Turn the key to position O or I I accessory Allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running Note Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge Il on All electrical circuits operational Warning lamps and indicators are illuminated Ill start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts KEYLESS STARTING WARNING The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as mobile phones Starting and Stopping the Engine Note A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch th
168. ands that can be used in the current mode ENTERTAINMENT Your system offers many media options You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands Browsing Device Content When listening to any type of audio you can browse through other devices without having to change sources For example if you are currently listening to the radio you can browse all the artists that are stored on your USB device Press the voice icon on the us steering wheel When prompted you Can Say BROWSE within Devices Browse Browse lt league gt games Browse lt Sirius category gt channels Browse CD track list Browse SD card Browse Sirius channel guide Browse USB Help If you only say Browse you can then say any commands in the following chart If equipped with SIRIUS satellite radio BROWSE lt League gt Games lt Sirius category gt channels CD Track List SD card Sirius Channel Guide MyFord Touch i Equipped BROWSE USB Help If equipped with SIRIUS satellite radio For more commands in SD card or USB mode see the SD Card and USB Port section of this chapter To change between AM and FM presets AM FM Radio just touch the AM or FM tabs Press the lower left corner of the D touchscreen and then select the AM or FM tabs
169. annels Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation Electronic Serial Number ESN is required when communicating with SIRIUS about your account Direct Tune Enter the desired satellite channel number using the on screen keypad Browse View a list of all available stations Scroll and select the desired station You can also lock or skip unwanted channels or view the song and artist on other stations SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information Note S RIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes 364 MyFord Touch i equipped BW xm SATELLITE RADIO E142593 SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle See your authorized dealer for availability For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required
170. are connected to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a complete list of available services from which to choose Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu 1 Press the phone button to enter the Phone menu 2 Scroll until Services appears in the display 3 Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu The display indicates the system is connecting Press OK SYNC initiates the call to the services portal Once you are connected to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a complete list of available services from which to choose Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help Receiving Turn by Turn Directions J When connected to SYNC Services say Directions or Business search To find the closest business or type of business to your current location just say Business search and then Search near me If you need further assistance in finding a location you can SYNC say Operator at any time within a directions or business search to speak with a live operator You may also be prompted to speak with an operator The live operator can assist you by searching fo
171. ark aid is activated be Deactivated Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting Displayed when the lane keeping aid is on per MyKey settings Park Aid Message Action Check Front Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer See Parking Aid page 174 Check Rear Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer See Parking Aid page 174 Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status 101 Information Displays Park Brake Message Action Park Brake Engaged Displays when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer Park Brake Malfunction Service Now The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service See your authorized dealer Park Brake Not Applied Apply Park Brake Displays when the electric parking brake is not set Park Brake Not Applied Re Apply Displays when the electric parking brake did not set Park Brake Maintenance Mode Displays when the electric parking brake is running a diagnostic check Park Brake Use Switch to Release Displays when the elect
172. arket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac system activates SLOW DOWN The AdvanceTrac Control system helps you keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface The electronic stability control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and roll stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction See Using Traction Control page 172 E72903 A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac skidding off its intended route
173. arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel to scroll through the available modes Entertainment ES Navigation MyFord Touch if equipped aa Climate Control You can make selections from the menu by using the OK button The selection menu expands and you are allowed different options Press the up and down arrows to scroll through the modes Press the right arrow to enter the mode Press the left or right arrows to make adjustments within the chosen mode Press OK to confirm your selection Note f your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation Compass appears in the display instead of Navigation If you press the right arrow to go into the Compass menu you can see the compass graphic The compass displays the direction in which the vehicle is traveling not true direction i e if the vehicle is traveling west the middle of the compass graphic displays west north displays to the left of west though its true direction is to the right of west Using Voice Recognition This system helps you control many features using voice commands This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you The system provides feedback through audible tones prompts questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction voice settings The system also asks short questions confirmation prompts whenit is not sure of your request or when the
174. art Replace cabin air filter if equipped Replace engine air filter Every 30000 miles 48000 km Change automatic transmission fluid Every 60000 miles 96000 km Replace spark plugs Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads Inspect frequently service as required Replace cabin air filter if equipped 430 Scheduled Maintenance Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads Replace engine air filter Every 5000 miles 8000 km Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Every 5000 miles 8000 km or six months Change engine oil and filter Perform multi point inspection Every 30000 miles 48000 km Change automatic transmission fluid Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Oil Check page 243 Monitor after each engine oil and filter change See Engine Exclusive Use of E85 Flex Fuel Vehicles only Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85 fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel Special Operating Condition Log O Erane roursoptona o Oereiverousiesione sd hours optional Q wmutepoint inspection recommended Multi point inspection recommended O sions o O O Soraw o O 431 Scheduled Maintenance
175. as Thumbs up Thumbs down etc For more information please visit www SYNCMyRide com Wi o N To Access Using Voice Commands 1 Press the voice icon 2 When prompted say Mobile Apps SYNC 3 Say the name of the application after the tone 4 The app should start While an app is running through SYNC you can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app such as Play Station Quickmix Say Help to discover available voice commands USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER You can access and play music from your digital music player over the vehicle s speaker system using the system s media menu or voice commands You can also sort and play your music by specific categories such as artists albums etc SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including iPod Zune Plays from device players and most USB drives SYNC also supports audio formats such as MP3 WMA WAV and ACC Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port Note f your digital media player has a power switch ensure that the device is turned on To Connect Using Voice Commands 1 Plug the device into the vehicle s USB port 2 Press the voice icon and when prompted say USB 3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands See the media voice commands To Connect Using the System Menu 1 Plug the device into the vehicle s USB port 2 Press AUX an
176. at Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not E157152 The front passenger sensing system uses a pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located at the top center of the instrument panel Note The indicator lamp will illuminate for a Short period of time when the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front
177. at may affect use of electronic devices while driving Note Most of the audio features are controlled through the MyFord Touch system See MyFord Touch page 335 Audio System B A 20 SONY LA c AUTO O P CLIMATE p oP f 4 TUNE max H source VOL SOUND D RGD LE Ke IH TUNE T AIG G A a l amp i TEMP TEM E144490 G F E A Power Switch the audio system on and off by pressing the button B CD slot Insert a CD C Eject Ejects a CD D TUNE TUNE Search the frequency band in individual increments E SOUND Allows you to adjust the sound settings Treble Bass Midrange Fade and Balance F VOL Turn the dial to adjust the volume G SOURCE Access different audio modes such as AM FM and A V Input H Seek Reverse Fast Forward In radio mode select a frequency band and press one of the seek buttons The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction In SIRIUS mode select the previous or next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc use the SEEK buttons find to the previous or next channel in the selected category In CD mode select the previous or next track M St t Press MENU SnU STASTIA Press the up and down arrow buttons to Note Depending on your system some scroll through the options if active options may appear slightly different not at all or on screen and able to be selected using the function buttons P
178. at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander 1 Note Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur 164 Note Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control system while attempting to rock the vehicle Emergency Maneuvers In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of
179. ating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example A P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association B 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire C 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width D R Indicates a radial type tire E 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter F 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your owner s manual If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law Wheels and Tires G H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and
180. ating of 87 is recommended Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended Premium fuel will provide improved performance and is recommended for severe duty usage such as trailer tow Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage REFUELING WARNINGS Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle This is against the law insome places Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container Place approved fuel container on the ground Do not fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling
181. ation has changed detection capabilities A parked vehicle has a high attachment i e salt sprayer snowplow moving truck bed etc The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly i e driving from a heated garage into the cold or after leaving a car wash REAR VIEW CAMERA reoupPeD WARNINGS The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle WARNINGS Use caution when using the rear video camera and the trunk is ajar If the trunk is ajar the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect All guidelines if enabled have been removed when the trunk is ajar Use caution when turning camera T features on or off while in R Reverse Make sure the vehicle is not moving The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind the vehicle The image will be displayed in either in the rear view mirror or the display in the center of the instrument panel Parking Aids
182. au of Industry and Security of the U S Department of Commerce To the extent that any such export laws rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement Entire Agreement These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NT and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter Severability You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is found illegal or unenforceable that portion shall be severed and the remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect Governing Law The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois without giving effect to i its conflict of laws provisions or ii the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods which is explicitly excluded You agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all disputes claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder Appendices Government End Users f the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other
183. avy objects on the seat Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running Doing so can cause the battery to lose charge E146941 Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights Seats REAR SEAT ARMREST jez p a E144635 Fold the armrest down to use the armrest and cupholder 135 Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink Wireless Control System if Equipped WARNINGS Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 Note Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming Note We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons See Erasing the function button codes later in this section Note You can program a maximum of three devices To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initi
184. ay off Touch switch C again to switch the door function back on The indicator lamp will illuminate blue when the door function is on When the door function is on and you open a door the courtesy and door lamps will switch on lt Dira E146410 A All lamps on switch B All lamps off switch C Door function switch You can switch individual map lamps on independently by touching a map lens Rear Interior Lamp if Equipped E142455 You can switch individual dome lamps on independently by pressing switch A Windows and Mirrors POWER WINDOWS WARNINGS Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings f E146043 Note You may hear a rumbling noise when just one of the windows are open Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise Press the switch to open the window Lift the switch to close the window One Touch Down Press the switch fully and release it Press or lift it again to stop the window One Touch Up Lift the switch fully and release it Press or lift it again to stop the window 72 Bounce Back The window will stop automatically while closing It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacl
185. ay the tracks or entire albums in random order or turn the feature off if already on Scan Hear a brief sampling of all available tracks More Info See disc information Options Sound Adjust Bass Treble Midrange Balance and Fade DSP if equipped Occupancy Mode if equipped and Speed Compensated Volume settings Compression Turn the compression feature on and off Browse Look through all available audio sources 368 MyFord Touch i equipped You can also advance and reverse the CD Voice Commands current track or current folder if f applicable If you are listening to a CD press us the voice button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands If you are not listening to a CD press the voice button and after the tone say CD then any of the following commands Cp Pause Play Play next track Play previous track Play track lt 1 512 gt Repeat Repeat folder Repeat off Repeat track Shuffle Shuffle CD Shuffle folder Shuffle off Help WMA or MP3 only 369 MyFord Touch if equipped SD Card Slot and USB Port SD Card Note Your SD card slot is spring loaded To remove the SD card press the card in and the system ejects it Do not attempt to pull the card to remove it as this could cause damage The card slot can also be used
186. ays use caution while reversing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle Selectable settings for this feature are ACTIVE FIXED FIXED and OFF Visual Park Aid Alert Note Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The system uses red yellow and green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object is detected by the reverse sensing system The alert highlights the closest object detected The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled highlighted areas are still displayed Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF Manual Zoom WARNING When manual zoom is on the full area behind the vehicle is not shown Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature Note Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note When manual zoom is enabled only the centerline is shown Parking Aids This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle The zoomed i
187. b ground metal surface 2 Remove the jumper cab e from the e onthe negative terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cab e from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cab e from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the battery can recharge 228 Fuses CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING A could start a fire Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and E142430 If electrical components in the vehicle are notworking a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate fuses components Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color before replacing any electrical FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box WARNINGS 1y Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses To reduce risk of e Color Fuse rating Micro fuses Dual micro fuses M type fuses J type fuses 5A Tan Tan 7 5A Brown Brown z 10A Red Red 15A Blue Blue Grey 20A Yellow Light Blue Blue 25A White White White 30A Green Pink Pink 40A Green Gr
188. backing out of a parking space Cross traffic alert is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist Driving Aids E142440 In this first example the left sensor is only partially obstructed zone coverage is nearly maximized E142441 Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles Here the left sensor is mostly obstructed zone coverage on that side is severely limited Driving Aids System Lights and Messages E142442 The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of the vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from Note The alert indicator dims when nighttime darkness is detected Cross traffic alert also sounds a series of tones and a message appears in the information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left Cross traffic alert works with the reverse sensing system which sounds its own series of tones See Parking Aid page 174 System Sensors WARNING Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and alerting the driver the number of missed objects will increase To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist Note t is possible to get a blockage warning with no blockage present
189. be released automatically 162 All Wheel Drive it Equipped USING ALL WHEEL DRIVE All wheel drive uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty Note A warning message will be displayed in the information display when an AWD system fault is present See Information Messages page 91 An AWD system fault will cause the AWD system to default to front wheel drive only mode When this warning message is displayed have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer Note A warning message will be displayed in the information display if the AWD system has overheated See Information Messages page 91 This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip such as deep sand To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible stop the vehicle in a safe location
190. belt snug and low across the hips To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in arear seating position WARNINGS
191. bstacle the rate of the audible warning increases When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches 25 centimeters away the warning sounds continuously If a stationary or receding object is detected farther than 10 inches 25 centimeters from the side of the vehicle the tone sounds for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the warning sounds again Parking Aids A a 3 os E130178 A Coverage area of up to 6 feet 2 meters from the rear bumper There is decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less but not moving and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h Front Sensing System The front sensors are active when the gearshift is in any position other than P Park or N Neutral and the vehicle speed is below 6 mph 10 km h 175 x s vIr t E130382 A Coverage area of up to 27 inches 70 centimeters from the front of the vehicle and about 6 14 inches 15 35 centimeters to the side of the front end of the vehicle Refer to the reverse sensing section for details on coverage area The system sounds an au
192. c Locking Mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible See Child Safety page 14 Safety Belts How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode E142591 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Safety Belt Extension Assembly WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision 29 If the safety belt is too short when fully extended a safety belt extension assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the
193. cable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer inan amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive arefund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Fourormorerepair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in
194. call Johnny Doe on mobile Say 3 after the tone to call Jane Doe at home You could also say Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe Say 2 after the tone to play Johnny Doe When You Say The System Media candidate lists off Makes a best guess from the media candidate list you may still occasionally be asked questions Media candidate lists on Clarifies your voice command for media candidates Phone candidate lists off Makes a best guess from the phone candidate list you may still occasionally be asked questions Phone candidate lists on Clarifies your voice command for phone candidates USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE Hands free calling is one of the main features of SYNC While the system supports a variety of features many are dependent on your cellular phone s functionality At a minimum most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions Answering an incoming call Ending a call Using privacy mode Dialing a number Redialing Call waiting notification Caller ID Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are phone dependent features To check your phone s compatibility see your phone s user manual and visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca Pairing a Phone for the First Time Note SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 2000 en
195. canceecass SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY 296 Heated Windows and Mirrors SERVICE PLANS U S OnLY c cccccsseseeeseeees Heated Exterior Mirror Front FOS LAMPS Heated Rear WiINdOW sescssesssesesseeees Front Passenger Sensing System 36 Heating Fuel and Refueling 150 See Climate Control Fuel CONSUMPTION ccessessssestesestesesteseeseeses 154 Hill Start Assist Calculating Fuel ECONOMY 154 Using Hill Start ASSISt es ceeeeeeeeeeees 162 Filling the Tank 154 Hints on Controlling the Interior Fuel Cut Off Switch 226 GMa t e 124 Fuel Filter ceeseccuesece 248 Cooling the Interior QUICKLY 25 15 General MINS i viscecceeMieracadsentadcecis 124 Choosing the Right Fuel 151 Heating the Interior Quickly 125 Octane Recommendations 151 Recommended Settings for Cooling 126 229 Recommended Settings for Heating 25 Fuse Specification Chart 229 Side Window Defogging in Cold Passenger Compartment Fuse WEATION o anenai aiis 26 Pan l Aicactindthviiualeacain Manhiadais 236 Hints on Driving With Anti Lock Power Distribution BOX ccscesecseessessesseeene 229 Brake Sinnige 168 Hood Lock G See Opening and Closing the Hood 239 Garage Door Opener See Universal Garage Door Opener 136 Ignition SWITCH eeesesestesestesestestestesesteseseees 143 In California U S Only 220 Information Display Control 63 Information Display
196. ccessful Solid green Solid red Remote stop successful engine off Remote start or stop failed Blinking red Blinking green Waiting for status update Remote Starting the Vehicle Note Fach button press must be done within three seconds of each other The vehicle will not remote start if this sequence is not followed and the horn will not chirp Keys and Remote Controls The tag with your transmitter details the starting procedure To remote start the vehicle 1 Press the lock button to lock all the doors 2 Press the remote start button twice The exterior lamps will flash twice The horn will chirp if the system fails to start unless quiet start is on Quiet start will run the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise It can be switched on or off in the information display See General Information page 83 Note f the vehicle has been remote started and is equipped with an integrated keyhead transmitter you must turn the ignition on before driving the vehicle If equipped with an intelligent access transmitter you must press the START STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving the vehicle The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the radio will not turn on automatically The parking lamps will remain on and the engine will run for 5 10 or 15 minutes depending on the setting 48 Extending th
197. ce follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a complete list of available services from which to choose Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Touchscreen If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation press the Information button If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation press the green tab on your touchscreen 1 Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your phone Once connected follow the voice prompts to request your desired Service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a complete list of available services from which to choose To return to the Services menu say Services or for help say Help Receiving Turn by Turn Directions 1 When connected to SYNC Services say Directions or Business search To find the closest business or type of business to your current location just say Business search and then Search near me If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say Operator at any time within a Directions or Business search to speak MyFord Touch if equipped with a live operator You may also be prompted to speak with an operator when the automatic system has difficulty matching your voice request T
198. cess key or touching the locking area on the handle with another intelligent access key in your hand When you open one of the front doors and ock the vehicle using the power door lock control all doors will lock then unlock if the ignition is on or the ignition is off and the vehicle is not inP Auto Relock If you press the unlock button on the remote control and do not open a door within 45 seconds your vehicle will lock and the alarm will arm This feature can be enabled or disabled in the information display See General Information page 83 Autolock Feature The autolock feature will lock all the doors when all doors are closed the ignition is on you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when any door is opened then closed while the ignition is on and the vehicle speed is 9mph 15 km h or lower and the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h Autounlock Feature The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when the ignition is on all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned off or to accessory and the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off or to accessory Note The doors will not autoun
199. choose Intersection from the available while viewing this screen are navigation screen you can choose from the following Ist Street 2nd Street Intersection Enter first street name Change first street name Enter second street name Change second street name Enter city Change city Enter state Change state 346 MyFord Touch i equipped The dual mode feature is also available when the voice system displays a list of items to pick from during a voice session where you would be able to touch the line item or say Line 2 If a command is not understood or there are multiple options the system returns a list for you to choose from SETTINGS Under the menu setting you can set your clock access and make adjustments to the display sound and vehicle settings as well as access settings for specific modes or the help feature Clock Note 7he date is set by your vehicle s GPS you cannot manually set the date Note f the battery has been disconnected the vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to update the clock Once your vehicle acquires the signal it may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time 1 Press the Settings icon gt Clock 2 Press and to adjust the time From this screen you can also make other adjustments such as 12 hour or 24 hour mode activate GPS time synchronization and have the system automatical
200. cle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb 1400 750 5 x 150 650 lb In metric units 635 340 5x 68 295 kg Load Carrying 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb 635 kg cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1400 5x 220 5x30 1400 1100 150 150 lb Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5x99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb 635 kg cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement fromthe local home improvement store to finish tha
201. cle by reading this manual The more that you know about it the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it WARNING Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle Note This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range sometimes even before they are generally available It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle Note Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different models so may appear different to your vehicle However the essential information in the illustrations is always correct Note Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations Note Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle Protecting the Environment You must play your part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim SYMBOLS GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle A Safety alert See Owner s Manual Gy Anti lock braking system Avoid smoking flames or sparks Battery E Battery acid Brake fluid non petroleum based Brake system Cabin air filter A Child safety door lock or unlock ild seat lower anchor ild seat tether anchor L Cruise control
202. con gt Display gt Edit Wallpaper then follow the system prompts to upload your photographs MyFord Touch if Equipped Only the photograph s which meets the following conditions display Compatible file formats are as follows jpg gif ong omp Each file must be 1 5 MB or less Recommended dimensions 800 x 384 Sound Press the Settings icon gt Sound then select from the following Sound Settings Bass DSP Midrange Occupancy Mode Treble Speed Compensated Volume Set Balance and Fade If equipped 3 Use the scroll bar to increase or Vehicle decrease the intensity Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle then select from the following Active Park Assist Ambient Lighting Vehicle Health Report Door Keypad Code Rear View Camera Enable Valet Mode Active Park Assist If Equipped When activated your system displays directions for you regarding the active park assist process See Active Park Assist page 176 Ambient Lighting If Equipped When activated ambient lighting illuminates footwells and cupholders with a choice of colors To access and make adjustments 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Ambient Lighting 2 Touch the desired color To turn the feature on or off press the power button Vehicle Health Report If Equipped Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and set the mileage interval at which you would like to receive the reports P
203. contamination of the airbag system Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces 258 Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean
204. cords Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water This could cause an electric shock or fire Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area clear of combustibles Make sure the heater heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter Using the Engine Block Heater The engine block heater plug is located in a housing in the left fog lamp bezel Open the hinged circular door and make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary The heater uses 0 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use The system does not have a thermostat It will achieve maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation If you use the heater longer than three hours this will not improve system performance and will use unnecessary electricity 147 Unique Driving Characteristics START STOP iF couipPep The system helps reduce fuel consumption by automatically shutting off and restarting your vehicle s engine while the vehicle is stopped The engine will restart automatically when you release the brake pedal In some situations your vehicle may restart automatically for example To
205. court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C sec 2301 et seq If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b or the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes Customer Assistance THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation and if your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing
206. cription E142806 Description Code Six speed automatic transmission W Six speed manual transmission B 289 Capacities and Specifications TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Item Brake fluid Door latch hood latch auxiliary hood latch Capacity Between MIN and MAX on reservoir Not applicable Ford Part Name or Equivalent Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Perform ance Brake Fluid Multi Purpose Grease lithium Ford Part Number Ford Specification PM 1 C WSS M6C65 A2 and ISO 4925 Class 6 XG 4 or XL 5 or equi valent ESB M1C93 trunk latch seat tracks grease B Lock cylinder Not applicable Motorcraft Penet XL 1 None rating and Lock Lubricant Automatic transmission 9 0 qt 8 5L Motorcraft XT 10 QLV MERCON LV ATF MERCON LV fluid Rear differential AWD fluid 1 2 qt 1 15L Motorcraft SAE 80W 90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY 8O0W90 OL WSP M2C197 A Power Transfer Unit PTU fluid AWD 2 0L EcoBoost engine oil 1 6L EcoBoost engine oil 5 6 11 8fl oz 0 35 L 57 at 5 4L 4 3 qt 4 1L 2 5L engine oil 57 at 5 4L Motorcraft SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant Motorcraft SAE 5W 30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil U S Motorcraft SAE 5W 30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil U S Motorcraft SAE 5W 30 Super Premium Motor Oil Canada Motorcraft SAE 5W 30 Synthetic
207. ct Start Route Fastest Uses the fastest moving roads possible Shortest Uses the shortest distance possible Eco EcoRoute Uses the most fuel efficient route 395 MyFord Touch it equipped You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding freeways toll roads ferries and car trains as well as to use or not use HOV lanes HOV lanes are High Occupancy Vehicle Lanes also known as carpool or diamond lanes These lanes are reserved for people who ride in buses vanpools or carpools Note f Start Route button is not pressed and the vehicle is driven on a recognized road the system defaults to the fastest route option and begins guidance During route guidance the talking bubble icon that appears in the upper right navigation corner green bar canbe pressed if the user wants the system to repeat a route guidance instruction Instructions decrease with each press Point of Interest POI Categories Your system offers a variety if POI Points of Interest categories Main Categories Food Drink amp Dining Automotive Travel amp Transportation Shopping Financial Entertainment amp Arts Emergency Recreation amp Sports Community Government Health amp Medicine Domestic Services Subcategories Restaurant Golf Parking Home amp Garden Personal Care Services
208. cted Heavy rain spray snow or fog is interfering with the radar signals The collision warning system is temporarily disabled Collision warning should automat ically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals The collision warning system is temporarily disabled Collision warning should automat ically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve 192 Driving Aids System Limitations WARNING 1y support can on speed at which the driver applies the brake pedal must be typical braking situat The collision warning system s brake y help reduce the a collision occurs if vehicle s brakes The pressed just like any on Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances where vehicles do not provide a collision warning These include Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving below 6 mph 10 km h Pedestrians or objects in the roadway Oncoming vehicles in the same lane Severe weather conditions see blocked sensor section Debris build up on the grille near the headlamps see blocked sensor section Small distance to vehicle ahead Steering wheel and pedal movements are large very active driving style Certain conditions may reduce the visibility of the warning lamp therefore it is recommended to
209. ction due toa BLOCKED Remove blocked sensor Objects Near Passenger Seat Alarm Message Action Vehicle Alarm to Stop Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor Alarm Start Vehicle ized entry See Anti Theft Alarm page 61 Auto Start Stop Message Action Auto StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine Auto StartStop Press Brake Harder to Activate Auto StartStop Press Clutch to Start Engine Auto StartStop Press Any Pedal Auto StartStop Select Neutral To Start Engine The engine needs to be restarted press the brake pedal to start The engine needs to be restarted press the brake pedal harder to Start The engine needs to be restarted press the clutch pedal to start The engine needs to be restarted press any pedal to start Select neutral for the system to restart the engine 93 Information Displays Message Auto StartStop Shift to P Restart Engine Action Select park for the system to restart the engine Auto StartStop Manual Restart Required The system is not functioning A manual restart is required Auto StartStop Not Available Displays when conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop system to function properly See Start Stop page 148 Engine Stopped StartStop has shutoff the engine automatically Engine On due to Vehicle Maneuvering The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
210. d that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner s manual See Capacities and Specifications page 286 Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership Factory Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received 420 Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Replacement Parts Dealerships stock Ford Motorcraft and Ford authorized branded re manufactured replacement parts These parts meet or exceed our specifications Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 12 month or 12000 mile 20000 kilometer parts and labor limited warranty If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part it could affect emissions compliance Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle from general maintenance to collision repairs Note Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops Please contact your dealer for details Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an in
211. d be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components BRAKE FLUID CHECK Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering EPS system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill Maintenance FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WASHER FLUID CHECK WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications See Capacities and Specifications page 286
212. d or missed calls while your Bluetooth enabled phone was connected to SYNC You can also choose to save these to Favorites or Quick Dial This is a phone dependent feature If your phone does not support downloading call history using Bluetooth SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system Messaging Send text messages using your touchscreen See the Text Messaging section for more information Settings Access various phone settings such as turning Bluetooth on and off managing your phonebook and more See the Phone Settings section for more information Text Messaging Note SYNC does not download read text messages from your phone Note Downloading and sending text You can send and receive text messages messages using Bluetooth are phone dependent features using Bluetooth read them aloud and translate text messaging acronyms such Note Certain features in text messaging aS LOL are speed dependent and cannot be 1 Touch the top left corner of the display completed when the vehicle is traveling at to access the Phone menu speeds over 3 mph 5 km h 2 Select Messaging 378 MyFord Touch i equipped 3 Choose from the following Listen Dial Send Text View Delete Composing a Text Message Note This is a spoeed dependent feature and cannot be completed when the vehicle is traveling at speeds over 5 mph 8 km h Note Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetoo
213. d pivot the cover off to access the key blade MANN O H EH SAVE FOR CUSTOMER RECORDS Note Your vehicle s backup keys were issued with a security tag that provides important vehicle key cut information Keep the tag in a safe place for future reference Using the Key Blade The key cylinder is hidden under a cap on the driver s side door handle To remove the cap E151956 Keys and Remote Controls 1 Insert the key blade into the slot on the bottom of the handle and press up 2 While maintaining upward pressure move the cap rearward to release it Gently remove the key while doing so To install the cap E151957 1 Place the cap just forward of the key cylinder 2 While applying pressure to the cap move it forward until it is in place You may hear a snap as it engages Make sure the cap is properly installed by trying to move it rearward Replacing the Battery Note Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board Note Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the vehicle The transmitter should operate normally A message will appear in the information display when the remote control battery is low See Information Messages page 91 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter The remote control uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032
214. d replacement oil filter The use of a non specified oil filter can result in engine damage For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals See Scheduled Maintenance page 420 Note Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 287 Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number is located on the left hand side of the instrument panel l XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX E142476 Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number The Vehicle Identification Number contains the following information Wii A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Restraint Devices and their locations XXX XXX X X XXXXXX A CcC D G H E142477 C Make vehicle line series body type D Engine type E Check digit F Model year G Assembly plant H Production sequence number VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG REAR GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG XXXX XXXXXXX DATE XX XX FRONT GAWR XXXXL XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXXXX RIMS XXXX XX AT XXX kPa XX PSLCOLD ATOXXX KPalxX PSI COLD
215. d seven times 35 consecutive button presses This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after one minute of keypad inactivity pressing the unlock button on the remote control the ignition is switched on unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access if equipped Unlocking and Locking the Doors To Unlock the Driver s Door Enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note Al doors will unlock if the all door unlocking mode is enabled See Locking and Unlocking page 52 To Unlock All Doors Enter the factory set code or your personal code then press 34 within five seconds To Lock All Doors Press and hold 7 8 and 9 0 at the same time with the driver s door closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first To Release the Trunk Enter the factory set code or your personal code then press 5 6 within five seconds Displaying the Factory Set Code With Integrated Keyhead Transmitters Note You will need to have two programmed passive anti theft keys for this procedure To display the factory set code in the information display 1 Insert a key into the ignition and turn the ignition on for a few seconds 2 Turn the ignition off and remove the key 3 Insert the second key into the ignition and turn the ign
216. d then MENU to enter the Media menu 3 Scroll until Select Source appears then press OK 4 Scroll to select USB and press OK 5 Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected device Indexing may appear in the radio display When indexing is complete the screen returns to the Play menu Press OK and scroll through selections of Play All Albums Genres Playlists Tracks Explore USB Similar Music Return What s Playing At any time when a track is playing you can press the voice icon and ask the system What s playing The system reads the metadata tags if populated of the playing track to you Media Voice Commands Press the voice icon and when us prompted say USB then any of the following SYNC USB Autoplay off Refine album lt name gt Autoplay on Refine artist lt name gt Connections Refine song lt name gt Pauses Refine track lt name gt Play Repeat off Play album lt name gt Repeat on Play all Search album lt name gt Play artist lt name gt Search artist lt name gt Play genre lt name gt Search genre lt name gt Play next folder Play next track Search song lt name gt Search track lt name gt Play playlist lt name gt Shuffle off Play previous folder Shuffle on Play previous track Similar music
217. d wipe it with a clean lint free cloth Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level If the level is at the MIN mark add oil immediately Adding Engine Oil Note Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running Note Do not add oil further than the MAX mark Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage E142732 Maintenance Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers 1 Remove the filler cap 2 Add engine oil that meets the Ford specifications See Capacities and Specifications page 286 3 Replace the filler cap Turn it until you feel a strong resistance Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring System Note Reset the oil life monitoring only after an oil change 1 Turn the ignition key to the on position Do not start the engine For vehicles with push button start press and hold the start button for two seconds without pressing the brake pedal Do not attempt to start the engine 2 Press both the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time Keep both pedals fully pressed 4 After three seconds the Service Oil reset in prog message will be displayed
218. dal and can reduce stopping distances in critical situations Anti lock Brake System This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking This lamp momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the anti lock braking system may be disabled and may need to be serviced QO braking is still effective If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released have your brake system serviced immediately If the system is disabled normal HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI LOCK BRAKES Note When the system is operating the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further Maintain pressure on the brake pedal You may also hear a noise from the system This is normal The ABS will not eliminate the risks when you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you your vehicle is hydroplaning you take corners too fast the road surface is poor Brakes ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE The electric parking brake replaces the conventional handbrake The operating switch is located in the center console WARNING Always set the parking brake and leave your vehicle with the transmission selector lever in position P automatic transmission or in position 1 or position R manual transmission Note When you apply the electric parking brake in certain conditions e g on a steep
219. ddress provided in the documentation for the DEVICE No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW FORD MOTOR COMPANY ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFT WARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE 408 End User Notice Microsoft Windows Mobile for Automotive Important Safety Information This system Ford SYNC contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement Any removal reproduction reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal action Read and follow instructions Before using your Windows Automotive based system read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual User s Guide Not following precautions found in this User s Guide can lead to
220. den stop which may increase the risk of serious injury Never place or allow achild to place T the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle Child Safety Restraint Child Use any attachment method as indicated below by X Type Weight LATCH LATCH Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt lower lower andtop andLATCH only anchors anchors tether lower and top only anchor anchors tether and top anchor tether anchor Rear facing Up to 48 lb x child seat 21 kg Forward Upto48lb x x x facing 21kg child seat Forward Over 48 lb x x facing 21 kg child seat Note The child seat must rest tightly against your vehicle seat It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint See Seats page 129 BOOSTER SEATS WARNING Never place or allow a child to place T the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Use a belt positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and
221. dible warning when obstacles are near either bumper in the following manner Objects detected by the front sensors are indicated by a high pitched tone from the front radio speakers Objects detected by the rear sensors are indicated by a lower pitched tone from the rear radio speakers The sensing system reports the obstacle which is closest to the front or rear of the vehicle For example if an obstacle is 24 inches 60 centimeters from the front of the vehicle and at the same time an obstacle is only 16 inches 40 centimeters from the rear of the vehicle the lower pitched tone sounds An alternating warning sounds from the front and rear if there are objects at both bumpers that are closer than 10 inches 25 centimeters Parking Aids For specific information on the reverse sensing portion of the system refer to that section ACTIVE PARK ASSIST iF EQUIPPED WARNING This system is designed to bea supplementary park aid It may not work in all conditions and is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment The driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe distance and speed even when the system isin use Note The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle supervising the system and intervening if required The system detects an available parallel parking space and automatically steers the vehicle into the space hands free while you contro
222. dio press the voice button and after the tone say SIRIUS then any of the If you are listening to SIRIUS following commands te satellite radio press the voice button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands SIRIUS lt 0 223 gt SAT 2 preset lt gt lt Channel name gt SAT 3 Preset lt gt SAT 3 preset lt gt SAT SIRIUS off SAT preset lt gt SIRIUS on SAT 1 Sports game SAT 1 Preset lt gt Tune SAT 2 Help Late availability If you have said Sports game see the following Sports game chart If you have said Tune see the following Tune chart SPORTS GAME Tune to the lt college name gt game Tune to the lt team city gt game Tune to the lt team city gt lt team name gt game Tune to the lt team name gt game Help 367 MyFord Touch if equipped TUNE lt 0 223 gt lt Channel Name gt Preset lt gt SAT SAT 1 SAT 1 preset lt gt SAT 2 SAT 2 preset lt gt SAT 3 SAT 3 preset lt gt Help cD Press the lower left corner of the D touchscreen then select the CD tab When You Select You Can Repeat Choose to repeat the currently playing track all tracks on the disc or turn the feature off if already on Shuffle Pl
223. disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period winch out available within 100 feet 30 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries towing Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 kilometers of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 kilometers from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 kilometers Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Vehicles Sold In The U S Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference This card is found in the owner s information portfolio in the glove compartment U S Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 kilometers To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers wi
224. display The vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed Press and release SET or SET The set speed will change in approximately 1mph 2 km h increments The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to the new set speed The set speed will display continuously in the information display while the system is active Resuming the Set Speed Note Resume should only be used if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it Press and release RES The vehicle will return to the previously set speed The set speed will display continuously in the information display while the system is active Low Speed Automatic Cancellation The system is not functional at vehicle speeds below 12 mph 20 km h An audible alarm will sound and the automatic braking will be released if the vehicle drops below this speed Hilly Condition Usage Note An audible alarm will sound and the system will shut down if it is applying brakes for an extended period of time This allows the brakes to cool down The system will function normally again when the brakes have cooled down You should select a lower gear position when the system is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades i e driving in mountainous areas Additional engine braking is needed in these situations to reduce the load on the vehicle s regular brake system to prevent them from overheating Switching the Syste
225. dissimilar spare tire at a time Use commercial car washing equipment Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following Handling stability and braking performance Comfort and noise Ground clearance and parking at curbs Winter weather driving capability Wet weather driving capability All wheel driving capability if applicable 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly do not Exceed 70 miles per hour 113 kilometers per hour Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly at a time Use commercial car washing equipment Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly Wheels and Tires The usage of a full size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following Handling stability and braking performance Comfort and noise Ground clearance and parking at curbs Winter weather driving capability Wet weather driving capability All wheel driving capability if applicable Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly additional caution should be given to Towing a trailer Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body Driving vehicles
226. ds until the indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly 2 When the indicator lights flash release the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased Reprogramming a Single Button To program a device to a previously trained button follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the button follow Step 1in the Programming section Universal Garage Door Opener For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2 Garage Door Opener Note The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed to operate with the garage door opener Note 70 program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the transmitter into programming mode A B Red indicator light Green indicator light 1 Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The indicator light will change from green to red and green Press the same button twice to confirm the change to programming mode If done properly the indicator light will appear red Hold the transmitter within 1 3 inches 2 8 centimeter of the button on the visor you want to program Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter and the button you want to program The indicator light on the visor will flash
227. ducts Both mirrors are heated to remove ice mist and fog when the heated rear window is switched on CABIN AIR FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter It is located behind the glove box The particulate filtration system is designed to reduce the concentration of airborne particles such as dust spores and pollen in the air being supplied to the interior of your vehicle Note A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign objects from entering the system Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system The particulate filtration system gives you and your passengers the following benefits It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration It improves the interior compartment cleanliness It protects the climate control components from particle deposits The filter should be replaced at regular intervals See Scheduled Maintenance page 420 For additional cabin air filter information or to replace the filter see an authorized dealer REMOTE START iF cquipPep The climate control system adjusts the cabin temperature during remote start You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation Turn the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings You can now make adjustments You need to turn certain vehicle dependent features back on such as heated seats heated mirrors heat
228. e undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range A decrease in operating range could be caused by weather conditions nearby radio towers structures around the vehicle other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions e g amateur radios medical equipment wireless headphones remote controls and alarm systems If the frequencies are jammed you will not be able to use your remote control You can lock and unlock the doors with the key Note Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended Note f you are in range the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally Intelligent Access if Equipped The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions are met You touch the inside of the front exterior door handle You press the luggage compartment button You press a button on the
229. e Vehicle Run Time Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still running to extend the run time for another remote start duration If you programmed the duration to last 10 minutes the second 10 minutes will begin after what is left of the first activation time For example if the vehicle had been running from the first remote start for five minutes the vehicle will continue to run now for a total of 15 minutes You can only extend the remote start once Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle shutdown Only two remote starts are allowed The ignition must be turned on and then back off or allow one hour to pass before using remote start again if additional remote starts are desired Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting Press the button once The 2X parking lamps will turn off You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle You can disable or enable the remote start system through the information display See General Information page 83 REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL Replacement or additional keys or remote controls can be purchased from your authorized dealer Your dealer can program the transmitters to your vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself See Passive Anti Theft System page 59 MyKey PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted dri
230. e acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation MS Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation MS SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The MS SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and or communicate with or may be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation FORD SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved The MS SOFTWARE and or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with and or communicate with or may be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by third party software and service suppliers The additional software and services of third party origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed not sold
231. e from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands After pressing the voice icon wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command Any command spoken prior to this does not register with the system Speak naturally without long pauses between words At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon Initiating a Voice Session Push the voice icon a tone us sounds and Listening appears in the display Say any of the following If You Want To Bluetooth audio Stream audio from your phone Cancel Cancel the requested action Line in Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack Mobile apps Access mobile applications Phone Make calls Services Access the SYNC Services portal SYNC Return to the main menu USB Access the device connected to your USB port Vehicle health report Run a vehicle health report SYNC Say Voice settings Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback If You Want To Help mode Hear a list of voice commands available in the current If equipped U S only System Interaction and Feedback The system provides feedback through audible tones prompts questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction
232. e hazard flashers 2 Place the transmission selector lever in position P automatic transmission or position R manual transmission and turn the engine off Remove the carpeted wheel cover 4 Remove the spare tire bolt securing the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise w 5 Remove the spare tire from the spare tire compartment E142550 Wheels and Tires 6 Remove the lug wrench and jack from the foam holder ae E142551 7 Block the diagonally opposite wheel 8 Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 9 The vehicle jacking points are shown here and are depicted on the yellow warning label on the jack Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle E145908 10 Small arrow shaped marks on the sills show the location of the jacking points E142553 11 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 12 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 13 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise OS 14 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown See Technical Specifications page 284 E75442 283 Wheels and Tires Stowing the flat tire 4 Re
233. e ignition on and start the engine Switching the Ignition On Accessory Mode START STOP E144447 Press the START button once It is located on the instrument panel near the steering wheel All electrical circuits and accessories are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate Starting Your Vehicle Carry out the following steps to start your vehicle 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Move the transmission selector lever to position P 3 Press the START button The system does not function if The key frequencies are jammed The key battery has no charge If you are unable to start your vehicle do the following 144 E147165 1 Place the remote in the backup slot inside the center console With the key in this position press the brake pedal then the START button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle 2 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary 1 Move the transmission selector lever to position P 2 Press the START button once Note The ignition all electrical circuits warning lamps and indicators will be switched off Note f the engine is left unattended for 30 minutes the ignition and engine automatically shut down Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving 1 Press and hold the START button for one second or press it three times within two seconds 2 Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes
234. e in the way Overriding the Bounce Back Feature Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window reaching the bounce back position The window will travel up with no bounce back protection The window will stop if the switch is released before the window is fully closed Global Opening and Closing Note The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not be activated in order for this feature to operate Note This feature can be disabled or enabled by your authorized dealer or in the information display See General Information page 83 You can open and close your vehicle s windows and vent the moonroof if equipped using the remote control Opening the Windows Press and hold the unlock button on the remote control to begin opening the windows and venting the moonroof if equipped Press the lock or unlock button on the remote control to stop motion Closing the Windows WARNING Before operating power windows and moonroof you should verify that they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of window openings Windows and Mirrors Press and hold the lock button on the remote control to begin closing the windows and moonroof if equipped Press the lock or unlock button on the remote control to stop motion Window Lock E144072 Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls It will illuminate
235. e laws Introduction EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Manual A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Manual is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Manual for all other required information and warnings Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children WARNINGS Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child All children are shaped differently Y The recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum WARNINGS req
236. e once the engine has cooled down Note Do not restart the engine until the cause of overheating has been resolved Type3 WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Fuel Gauge Switch the ignition on The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or ona gradient The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located E144486 Instrument Cluster A Left Information Display B Speedometer C Right Information Display See General Information page 335 Left Information Display Odometer Located in the bottom of the information display Registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled Trip Computer See General Information page 83 Vehicle Settings and Personalization See General Information page 83 WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious Some lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information Note Some warning indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start your vehicle Adaptive C
237. e settings can be configured right after a MyKey is first created or changed afterward with an admin key Vehicle speed limit of 65 70 75 and 80 mph 105 113 121 and 130 km h Visual warnings are displayed followed by an audible tone when vehicle speed has reached the selected top speed Vehicle speed minder of 45 55 or 65 mph 75 90 or 105 km h Visual warnings are displayed followed by an audible tone when the preselected vehicle speed is exceeded Audio system maximum volume of 45 A message in the audio system is displayed when attempting to exceed the limited volume Also speed sensitive compensated volume feature will be disabled Always on setting When this is selected you will not be able to disable AdvanceTrac 911 Assist or the Do not disturb feature if your vehicle is equipped with these features CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display control to create a MyKey 1 Insert the key you want to program into the ignition or if the vehicle is equipped with push button start put the intelligent access key in the backup slot Backup slot information is located ina different chapter See Starting and Stopping the Engine page 143 2 Turn the ignition on 3 Access the main menu on the information display controls and select Settings then MyKey by pressing OK or the gt button 4 Press OK to select Create MyKey 5 When prompted hold the OK button until you see a message
238. e space is found the touch screen displays a message and a chime sounds Slow down and stop at approximately position A then follow the instructions on the touch screen Note You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times in the maneuver Note Vehicles with overhanging loads e g a bus ora truck street furniture and other items may not be detected by active park assist You must make sure the selected space is suitable for parking Note The vehicle should be driven as parallel to other vehicles as possible while passing a parking space Note The system always offers the last detected parking space i e if the vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving it offers the last one Note f driven above approximately 20 mph 35 km h the touch screen shows a message to alert you to reduce vehicle speed E130108 When you think the vehicle has enough space in front and behind it or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid bring the vehicle to a complete stop Automatic Steering into Parking Space Note f vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph 10 km h the system switches off and you need to take full control of the vehicle Note f a maneuver is interrupted before completion the system switches off The steering wheel position will not indicate the actual position of the steering and you have to full take control of the vehicle With your hands off the wheel and
239. e thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust Cover chrome and stainless steel parts witha thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration Re wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed Lubricate all hood door and trunk lid hinges and latches with a light grade oil Cover interior trim to prevent fading Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature With your foot on the brake shift through all the gears while the engine is running Fuel system Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle 260 Note During extended periods of vehicle storage 30 days or more fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation Add a quality gas stabilizer product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 30 days Follow the instructions on the additive label The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system Cooling system Protect against freezing temperatures When removing veh
240. e using the wrong voice commands You may not be saying the name exactly as it is saved The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it Review the media voice commands at the beginning of the media section Say the song or artist exactly as they are listed If you say Play Artist Prince the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation Make sure you are saying the complete title such as California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles If the songs are saved in all CAPS you have to spell them LOLA requires you to say L O L A Do not use special charac ters in the title as the system does not recognize them SYNC does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when want to make a call You may be using the wrong voice commands You may not be saying the name exactly as it is saved Contacts in your phone book may be very short and similar or they may contain special characters Your phonebook contacts may be saved in CAPS 333 Review the phone voice commands at the beginning of the phone section Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as they are listed For example if a contact is saved as Joe Wilson say Call Joe Wilson SYNC Voice Command Issues Possible Cause s Possible Solution s The system works better if you list full names s
241. e vehicle Your vehicle has anti lock brakes therefore apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on Snow and Ice WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle Note Excessive tire slippage can cause driveline damage AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop All Wheel Drive it Equipped Avoid sudden braking as well Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slo
242. eatures Delete Device Delete a paired phone Press OK and scroll to select the device Press OK to confirm Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired phones and all information originally saved with those phones Press OK to select Return Exit the current menu This is a speed dependent feature 312 SYNC Advanced Menu Options 3 Scroll until Advanced appears then Press the phone button to enter the PETON Phone menu 4 Scroll to select from the following 2 Scrolluntil System Settings appears options then press OK If You Select You Can Prompts Get help from SYNC by using questions helpful hints or asking you for a specific action To turn these prompts on or off 1 Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or off 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Languages Choose between English Fran ais and Espa ol Once selected all of the radio displays and prompts are in the selected language 1 Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages 2 Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display If you change the language setting the display indicates that the system is updating When complete SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings This selection does not erase your indexed information phonebook c
243. ect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice All Wheel Drive if Equipped If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the Pavement If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck WARNINGS Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer Do not spin the wheels
244. ectric parking brake by turning the ignition on pressing the brake pedal and then pressing the electric parking brake switch When the electric parking brake is released the brake system warning lamp will turn off Driving with a Trailer Depending on the grade and the weight of the trailer your vehicle and trailer may roll backwards slightly when you start ona slope To prevent this from happening do the following 1 Pull the switch up and hold it in this position 2 Drive your vehicle then release the switch when you notice that the engine has developed sufficient driving force Automatic release drive away release Note On automatic transmission vehicles the driver s door must be closed and the driver s safety belt must be fastened before this feature will operate Note f the electric parking brake warning lamp stays illuminated the electric parking brake will not automatically release You must release the electric parking brake using the electric parking brake switch Note The engine must be running and the accelerator pedal must be pressed before the drive away release feature will operate Brakes Note On manual transmission vehicles if the transmission selector lever is in position N when you release the clutch pedal and press the accelerator pedal the electric parking brake will release automatically Note On manual transmission vehicles the clutch pedal must be fully pressed before
245. ed channel Action None This message should disappear shortly Sat Fault SIRIUS System Failure Internal module or system failure present If this message does not clear shortly or with an igni tion key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service Invalid Channel Channel no longer available Tune to another channel or choose another preset Unsubscribed Channel Subscription not available for this channel Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel No Signal Loss of signal from the The signal is currently being SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS blocked When you move tower to the vehicle into an open area the signal antenna should return Updating Update of channel None The process may take programming in progress up to three minutes Call SIRIUS Satellite service hasbeen Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 1 888 539 7474 deactivated by SIRIUS satellite radio 539 7474 to reactivate or resolve subscription issues No Channels Available All the channels in the selected category are skipped or locked Using the channel guide unlock or unskip the chan nels Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your vehicle None 366 MyFord Touch if equipped SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite Commands ra
246. ed by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that the parking brake is set the transmission selector lever is in position P automatic transmission or N manual transmission the ignition is off the driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled 1 Turn the ignition on DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off approximately one minute After Step 2 wait an additional five seconds before proceeding with Step 3 Once Step 3is started the procedure must be completed within 60 seconds Safety Belts 3 Forthe seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt four times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state After Step 3 the safety belt warning light will turn on 4 While the safety belt warning light is on buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt After Step 4 the safety belt warning light will flash for confirmation This will disable the feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled This will enable the feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safe
247. ed in this agreement and you may not a use this Data with any products systems or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation positioning dispatch real time route guidance fleet management or similar applications or b with or in communication with including without limitation cellular phones palmtop and handheld computers pagers and personal digital assistants or PDAs WARNING This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time changing circumstances sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic Data any of which may lead to incorrect results No Warranty This Data is provided to you as is and you agree to use it at your own risk NT and its licensors and their licensors and suppliers make no guarantees representations or warranties of any kind express or implied arising by law or otherwise including but not limited to content quality accuracy completeness effectiveness reliability fitness for a particular purpose usefulness use or results to be obtained from this Data or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free Appendices Disclaimer of Warranty NT AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES EXPRESS ORIMPLIED OF QUALITY PERFORMANCE MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON
248. ed rear window You can adjust the settings using the information display controls See Information Displays page 83 Automatic Settings You can set the climate control to operate in AUTO mode through the information display setting Remote Start gt Climate Control gt Heater A C gt Auto The climate control system automatically sets the interior temperature to 72 F 22 C In hot weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C In moderate weather the system either heats or cools based on previous settings The rear defroster heated mirrors and heated seats are not automatically turned on In cold weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C The heated seats are set to high if available and selected to AUTO in the information display The rear defroster and heated mirrors are automatically turned on Climate Control Last Settings You can set the climate control to operate using the last climate control settings through the information display setting Remote Start gt Climate Control gt Heater A C gt Last Settings The climate control system automatically uses the settings last selected before the vehicle was turned off Heated and Cooled Devices The climate control system controls other heated and cooled devices inside the vehicle These devices if available and selected to AUTO in the information displays may also be switched on during remote start Heated devices are typically switched
249. ee driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance 1 M Testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs toinspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced See On Board Diagnostics Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing 156 If the vehicle
250. eed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall E142667 Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Note Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant and AWD PTU Power Transfer Unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary E143950 Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly All Wheel Drive it Equipped
251. een 50A Red 60A Yellow WARNINGS ectrical shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs 229 The power distribution box is located in If the battery has been disconnected and the engine compartment It has reconnected some features will need to high current fuses that protect your be reset See Changing the 12V Battery vehicle s main electrical systems from page 248 overloads E144783 The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 254A Wiper motor 2 Starter relay 15A Autowipers Blower motor relay 20A Power point 3 Back of console 2 3 a Not used Fuses Fuse relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 7 20A Powertrain control module vehicle power 8 20A Powertrain control module vehicle power 2 9 Powertrain control module relay 10 204A Power point 1 driver front 11 154 Powertrain control module vehicle power 4 12 154 Powertrain control module vehicle power 3 13 OA Powertrain control module vehicle power 5 14 OA Powertrain control module vehicle power 6 15 Run start relay 16 20A Power point 2 console 17 Not used 18 10A Powertrain control module keep alive power 19 10A Electronic
252. eep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching your vehicle seat gives the best protection ina severe crash 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat For outboard seating positions route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts For the center seating positions route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint If needed the head restraints can also be removed E144274 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position then open the tether anchor cover E144275 3 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown Child Safety 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use CHILD SAFETY LOCKS When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside E112197 The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Left Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock Right Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock 25 Safety Belts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
253. eft A V input jacks red and white Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen then select the A V Inputs tab To use the auxiliary input jack feature make sure that your portable media player is designed to be used with headphones and that it is fully charged You also need an audio extension cable with stereo male one eighth inch 3 5 millimeter connectors at one end and a RCA jack at the other 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio and portable device turned off 2 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end into the adapter in one of the two left A V input jacks white or red inside the center console 3 Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen Select either a tuned station from the FM tab or the CD tab if there is a CD already loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 4 Turn the portable media player on and adjust the volume to one half the maximum 5 Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen Select the A V In tab You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 6 Adjust the sound on your portable media player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the controls In order to playback vi deo from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you MUST have a special combi composite video cab purchase from A
254. egister There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report but you must register to use this feature Note This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone Before running a report review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice Note n order to allowa break in period for your vehicle you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles Note Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www SYNCMyRide com After registering you can request a Vehicle Health Report inside your vehicle Return to your account at www SYNCMyRide com to view your report You can also choose for SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage intervals Cellular phone airtime Usage may apply when reporting The system allows you to check your vehicle s overall health in the form of diagnostic report card The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable information such as Vehicle diagnostic information Scheduled maintenance Open recalls and Field Service Actions Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer Making a Report To run a report by touchscreen touch the Information button gt Apps gt Vehicle Health Report To run a report by voice us command press the voice button on
255. eight that a trailer pushes down on atrailer hitch Examples For a 5000 lb 2268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtaina proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb 227 to 340 kg For an 11500 lb 5216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1725 to 2875 lb 782 to 1304 kg WARNINGS Do not exceed the GYWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNINGS Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations Exceeding any vehicle weight rating T limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 lb and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehi
256. el horoscopes stock prices and more 911 Assist Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency Vehicle Health Report if equipped U S only Provides a diagnostic and maintenance report card of your vehicle 911 Assist WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a crash the system will not dial for help which could delay response time potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash 314 yourself Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash the system or phone may be damaged or non functional A Always place your phone in a secure location in the vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a collision Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly Note The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident Note Before setting this feature on ensure that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information Note f 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user that setting applies for all paired phones If 911 Assist is turned off either a voice message plays or a display message icon comes on or both when the vehicle is started after a previously paired pho
257. elect 2 Scroll to select from Call History Incoming Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed Press OK make your selection 3 Press OK or the phone button to call the desired selec tion The system attempts to automatically re download your phone book and call history each time your phone connects to SYNC if the auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone supports this feature Phonebook Allows you to access your downloaded phonebook 1 Press OK to confirm and enter If your phonebook has fewer than 255 listings they appear alphabetically in flat file mode If there are more they are organized into alphabetical categories 2 Scroll until the desired contact appears then press OK 3 Press OK or the phone button Text Message Enables you to send download and delete text messages Allows you to view your phone s status set ring tones select your message notification change phone book entries and automatically download your cellular phone among other features Phone Settings SYNC Services Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request various types of information traffic reports and directions 307 SYNC When You Select You Can 911 Assist Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you after an accident if the feature is used properly Vehicle Health Report Create and receive a diagnostic report card
258. eless networks Playing video Editing the screen s wallpaper or adding new wallpaper Text Messages Composing text messages Viewing received text messages Editing preset text messages Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination Demo navigation route Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas 338 MyFord Touch if Equipped Privacy Information When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently Among other things this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book text messages read and unread and call history including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system In addition if you connect a media device the system creates and retains an index of supported media content The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur The cellular profile media device index and development log remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected If you no longer plan to use
259. en if the brake pedal is lightly pressed Driving Aids Using the Collision Warning System WARNING The collision warning system s brake support can only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the driver applies the vehicle s brakes The brake pedal must be pressed just like any typical braking situation 1 The warning system and chime can be turned on and off separately by using the information display control See General Information page 83 Note f the system cannot be turned off in a vehicle equipped with MyKey See Principle of Operation page 49 Blocked Sensors E O A E145632 If a message regarding a blocked sensor appears in the information display the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed The sensors are located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille When the sensors are obstructed a vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the collision warning system doesnot function The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed Cause Action The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruc tion The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display Wait a short time It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstru
260. en one of the front doors and lock the vehicle with the power door lock control all the doors will lock then unlock and the horn will chirp twice if your key is still in the ignition The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition by using the keyless entry keypad with the driver door closed or by pressing the lock button on the transmitter even if the doors are not closed If both front doors are closed the vehicle can be locked by any method regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not Smart Unlocks For Intelligent Access Keys If Equipped This feature helps to prevent you from unintentionally locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle s passenger compartment or rear cargo area Locks When you electronically lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door lock control with any door open vehicle in park and ignition off after you close the last door the vehicle will search for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment If an intelligent access key is found inside the vehicle all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will chirp twice indicating that the intelligent access key is inside In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside the vehicle you can lock your vehicle after all doors are closed by using the keyless entry keypad pressing the lock button on another intelligent ac
261. en stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather place the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A C performance Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective If your transmission is equipped with a grade assist or Tow Haul feature use this feature when towing This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling Allow more distance for stopping with atrailer attached Anticipate stops and brake gradually Avoid parking on a grade However if you must park on a grade Turn the steering wheel to point the vehicle tires away from traffic flow Set the vehicle parking brake Place automatic transmission in position P Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels Chocks not equipped with vehicle Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft PWC Note Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Note Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval Do not allow the static water l
262. en the text message or do nothing and the message goes into your text message inbox Press OK again and SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the message You can then also choose whether you d like to reply or forward the message Press OK and scroll to choose between Reply to Text Message Press OK to access and then scroll through the list of pre defined messages to send Forward Text Message Press OK to forward the message to anyone in your Phonebook or Call History You can also choose Enter Number Sending Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages Text messaging is a phone dependent feature If your phone is compatible SYNC allows you to receive send download and delete text messages 1 Press the phone button 2 Scroll until Text Message appears then press OK Scroll to select from the following options Send Text Message enables you to send anew text message based ona pre defined set of 15 messages Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages only to SYNC To download the messages press OK to select The display indicates your messages are being downloaded When complete SYNC takes you to your inbox Delete All Messages allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC not your phone To delete the messages press OK to select The display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted and SYNC returns you to the text message menu
263. entity providing the Supplemental Component s shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component s FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE Appendices Links to Third Party Sites The MS SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE The third party sites are not under the control of MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their designated agent are responsible for i the contents of any third party sites any links contained in third party sites or any changes or updates to third party sites or ii webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites those links are provided to you only as a convenience and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent Obligation to Drive Responsibly You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road You will read and abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and
264. entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government this Datais a commercial term as that term is defined at 48 C F R FAR 2 101 is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following Notice of Use and be treated in accordance with such Notice NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER NAME NAVTEQ CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER ADDRESS 425 West Randolph Street Chicago IL 60606 This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 and is subject to the End User License Agreement under which this Data was provided 2011 NAVTEQ All rights reserved If the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official must notify NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data Wi Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 2013 JiWire Gracenote Copyright CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593
265. epair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire Wear E142546 When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch 2 mm When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed Wheels and Tires or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so
266. er Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction Fuel and Refueling FUEL QUALITY Note We recommend that you use only high quality fuel without additives or other engine treatments Choosing the Right Fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 15 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel fuel fuel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the emission control system Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause vehicle damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Octane Recommendations 2 5L engine Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 is recommended Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended 1 6L and 2 0L EcoBoost engines Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane r
267. er is Unavoidable proceed very slowly Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall FLOOR MATS E142666 WARNINGS Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to ensure mats do not shift out of position Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floo
268. erate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Turn the ignition to crank 3 Turn the ignition off 4 Turn the ignition on again to re enable the fuel pump For vehicles equipped with a push button start system 1 Press the START STOP button to turn the ignition off 2 Press the brake pedal and press the START STOP button crank attempt 3 Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the START STOP button ignition off 4 Press the START STOP button again to re enable the fuel system JUMP STARTINGTHE VEHICLE WARNINGS The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage A Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Only use an adequate size cable with insulated clamps Preparing Your Vehicle Note Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle Note Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Turn all accessories off R
269. erform a multi point inspection recommended Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level Consult your dealer for requirements Inspect the brake pads shoes rotors drums brake linings hoses and parking brake Inspect the cabin air filter Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields Inspect the rear axle and U joints Lubricate any areas with grease fittings AWD vehicles Inspect the half shaft boots Inspect the steering linkage ball joints suspension tire rod ends driveshaft and U joints Lubricate any areas with grease fittings AWD vehicles Inspect the tires tire wear and measure the tread depth Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between service intervals Reset the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change See Engine Oil Check page 243 Additional Maintenance Items Every 20000 miles 32000 Replace cabin air filter km Every 30000 miles 48000 Replace engine air filter km At 100000 miles 160000 Change engine coolant km Every 100000 miles Replace spark plugs 160000 km 424 Scheduled Maintenance Additional Maintenance Items Inspect accessory drive belt s Change automatic transmission fluid
270. ering the vehicle Heated seat if equipped Turn the driver or passenger heated seats on and off See Heated Seats page 134 120 Climate Control MAX A C Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full cool position Recirculated air is distributed through the instrument panel air vents air conditioning is automatically turned on the fan speed is automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool position This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When recirculated air is selected the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may also reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce the possibility of fogging AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL Note You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius See Settings page 347 E144493 Driver heated seat control Turn the driver heated seat on and off See Heated Seats page 134 Driver temperature control Press or to increase or decrease the air temperature for the driver side of the vehicle This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged 121 Climate Con
271. es 12 Speed Control See Cruise Control Stability Control i Principle Of Ope ratiOn cccccesesesesesseseeeseees 173 Starter Switch See Ignition Switch Starting a Gasoline Engine 145 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes Important Ventilating Information Starting and Stopping the Engine General INfOrMatiOn cccseceeceeeeeseeneees Sro ASIKO o E EEA A terres Disabling Auto StartStop S Enabling Auto StartStop Steer E eere e a E EE EEE Electric Power Ste e ring cccccsscceseeseseeseeee Steering Wheel Storage Compartments x SON VISOMSs sssisatictctatsstsstszs acces ssosevsestvvovevveesnseaetes Illuminated Vanity MirrOl cscscseseeeseeeseseees Supplementary Restraints System Principle of Operation Symbols GlOSSAPY c cccesceseeees SYNC Applications and Services 911 Assist SYNC AppLink SYNC Services Traffic Directions amp T Technical Specifications See Capacities and Specifications 286 The Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program U S OMly cccseeesesees 221 444 Tire Care es Glossary of Tire Terminology As Information About Uniform Tire Quality GRACING 5 cidsd ce arn deectiase 265 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall Temperature ABC Traction AAABC Treadwear Tire Pressure Monitoring System 262 Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring SYSTEM cccsccceses
272. ese differences are described below A LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks B Load Range and Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits C Maximum Load Dual lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle D Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle Information on T Type Tires T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire Wheels and Tires E142545 T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below A T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks B 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire C 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width
273. eseseeeseeseeteees 263 Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring SYSTEM u escsescesceseseseeeseeseseees 263 Tire Pressures See Technical Specifications c ee 284 Tires See Wheels ANd TIS 262 Towing a Trailer Load Placement Towing the Vehicle on Four Emergency Towing Recreational Towing TOWING esesecestesteeesees Traction COMtIOL csessessssessesestssessecseseesesees Principle Of OPeratiOn ccccceseeseseseseeeseeees Transmission Code Designation TRANSMISSION sessdedicc dshevdeeeticcc Transporting the Vehicle U Under Hood Overview 1 6L ECOBOOSt 2c scieseatiindiansiiannasien 240 Under Hood Overview 2 0L ECOBOOSt cscssessssesesssessssesesesesssseseseesesees 241 Under Hood Overview 2 5 Lu 242 Unique Driving Characteristics Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink Wireless Control System 136 USB POM iinn as n easiness 114 Index Using Adaptive Cruise Control Blocked Sensor Changing the Set Speed Detection Issues Disengaging the System Following a Vehicle Hilly Condition Usage Low Speed Automatic Cancellation Overriding the System Resuming the Set Speed Setting a Speed Setting the Gap Distance Switching the System Off Switching the System On Switching to Normal Cruise Control System Not Available Using All Wheel Drive Driving In Special Conditions With All Wheel Drive AWD sing Cruise Control Switchi
274. evel to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 centimeters above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components Causing internal damage to the components Affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the rear axle has been submerged in water Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or other axle repair is required Towing TRANSPORTINGTHE VEHICLE E143886 If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure If the vehicle is towed incorrectly or by any other means vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle Front wheel drive FWD vehicles can be towed from the front if proper wheel Lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the ground The rear wheels ca
275. even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided Always transport children 12 years T old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints 1 All occupants of your vehicle Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries Airbags can kill or injure a childina child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat inthe front seat move the seat all the way back Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Several airbag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation If the airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision 34 The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag Note You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys This is normal The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
276. eys are programmed to the vehicle See Creating a MyKey page 49 cannot clear the restricted keys The key in the ignition does not have admin privileges No restricted keys are programmed to the vehicle See Creating a MyKey page 49 lost the only admin key Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer I lost a key Program a spare key See Passive Anti Theft System page 59 No restricted key functions with intelligent access key push button start An admin fob is present at engine start Up No MyKey keys are programmed to the vehicle See Creating a MyKey page 49 MyKey miles do not accumulate The MyKey key is not being used by the intended user The key system has been reset 5 Locks LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock the vehicle Power Door Locks The power door lock control is located on the driver and front passenger door panels E138628 A B Unlock Lock Door Lock Indicator An LED on each door window trim will light when the door is locked It will remain lit for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is switched off Switch Inhibitor When you electronically lock your vehicle the power door lock switch will no longer operate after 20 seconds You must unlock your vehicle with the remote control or keyless keypad or switch the ignition on to res
277. for proper function BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives animpact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner Automatic Locking Mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to Use the Automati
278. for your navigation system if equipped See Navigation page 395 55o F E142619 The SD card slot is located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel To access and play music from your device press the lower left corner of the touchscreen A E142620 SD logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC USB Port 4 O00 E142621 The USB ports are located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel To access and play music from your device press the lower left corner of the touchscreen This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks flash drives or thumb drives and also charge devices if they support this feature In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you MUST have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable available for purchase from Apple When the cable is connected to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port Playing Music from Your Device Insert your device and select the D USB or SD Card tab once the system recognizes it You can choose from the following options MyFord Touch i equipped When You Select You Can Repeat Shuffle order Repeat the currently playing song or album Play music on the selected album or folder in random Similar Music Choose music similar to that which is cu
279. formation it collects for any purpose If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www SYNCMyRide com See Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement at www SYNCMyRide com for more information SYNC Services Traffic Directions amp Information TDI Note SYNC Services requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services Standard phone and message rates may apply Subscription may be required You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to and use SYNC Services See Using SYNC With Your Phone page 302 Note This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone Make sure your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services SYNC Note The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result inan unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be
280. fter 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires arecall M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season Wheels and Tires J Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others K Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle L Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions ona specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on we
281. further reduction in driving alertness another warning may be issued which will remain in the information display for a longer time Press OK on the steering wheel control to clear the warning System Display When active the system will run automatically in the background and only issue a warning if required You can view the status at any time using the information display See General Information page 83 The alertness level is shown by six steps in acolored bar E131358 Alertness level is fine no rest required E131359 Alertness level is critical indicating that a rest should be taken as soon as safely possible Driving Aids The status bar will travel from left to right as the calculated alertness level decreases As the rest icon is approached the color turns from green to yellow and then finally red when a rest break should be taken Green No rest required Yellow First temporary warning Red Second warning Note f you have recently received a warning you should consider resting even if the current assessment is with the typical range Note The alertness level will be shown in grey if the camera sensor cannot track the road lane markings or if the vehicle speed drops below approximately 40 mph 65 km h Resetting the System You can reset the system by either Switching the ignition off and on Stopping the vehicle and then opening and closing the driver s door COLLIS
282. g You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above 2 Account Information You agree a when registering the TeleNav Software to provide TeleNav with true accurate current and complete information about yourself and b to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information and to keep it true accurate current and complete Appendices 3 Software License Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal non exclusive non transferable license except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license without the right to sublicense to use the TeleNav Software in object code form only in order to access and use the TeleNav Software This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties 3 1 License Limitations You agree not to do any of the following a reverse engineer decompile disassemble translate modify alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof b attempt to der
283. g and Closing the Hood Under Hood Overview 1 6L ECOBOOS iiscsssictei dedi cena 240 Under Hood Overview 2 0L EGOBOOS s cxtcissccisinnestensn tees 241 Under Hood Overview 2 5L 242 Engine Oil Dipstick 1 6L E OBOOSTO innin 243 Engine Oil Dipstick 2 5L 2 0L ECOBOOST irnn hnn 243 Engine Oil Check 2 5L 1 6L EcoBoost 2 0L EcoBoost 243 Engine Coolant Check 2 5L 1 6L EcoBoost 2 0L EcoBoost 244 Automatic Transmission Fluid Power Steering Fluid Check cccee 247 Fuel Filter eeseesessseesessessesseeseeseeseeseescesseeseens 248 Washer Fluid Check 1248 Changing the 12V Battery 248 Checking the Wiper Blades 249 Changing the Wiper BladesS 249 Changing the Engine Air Filter 2 5L 1 6L EcoBoost 2 0L EcoBoost 250 Adjusting the Headlamps 251 Removing a HeadlaM scccecsesesseseees 252 Changing a BULD cscs 252 Bulb Specification Chart 253 Vehicle Care General INfOrmatiOn cscseseeceeeses Cleaning PrOdUCctS c ccccesessessssessesesteseeseees Cleaning the Exterior Repairing Minor Paint Damage WAXING rarei Cleaning the Engine ccccsesesssesseesees Cleaning the Windows and Wiper 2k 6 o pierre reer eee reece terre 257 Cleaning the INteriol cece 257 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster LENS 258 Cleaning Leather Seats Cleanin
284. g the Alloy WheelS ccc0 259 Vehicle StOrAGe c eccceccsesesessssesseseseeseseens 259 Wheels and Tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System 262 Tife Carey sisiisininiinitiicccntiiiuieins 265 USING SNOW ChaiinS ccsesccssesestesesteeseseees 280 Changing a Road Wheel 280 Technical Specifications 284 Capacities and Specific ations Engine Specifications 286 Motorcraft Parts ccccsscsessseseseseseseesesees 286 Vehicle Identification Numbet 288 Vehicle Certification Label 288 Transmission Code Designation 289 Technical Specifications 290 Table of Contents Accessories ACCESSO ES i sctesetscitscasststasastainiainnrsiainaine 293 Ford Extended Service Plan ESP Ford Extended Service Plan ESP 295 SYNC General INfFOrMAtiON cceseceseceseeeees 298 Using Voice Recognition 300 Using SYNC With Your Phone 302 SYNC Applications and Services 314 Using SYNC With Your Media PLAY Clee eee eee teeta 321 SYNC TroubleShooting cccescecceeeees 328 MyFord Touch General INfFOrMAtION csecsesseseceeeeeees 335 SOTHNSS iia SR 347 EntertainMent di sccssscccssicstcatenweawesais 356 Appendices End User License Agreement 404 Scheduled Maintenance Scheduled Maintenance 420 Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehi
285. g the Head Restraint Raising the Head Restraint Pull the head restraint up Lowering the Head Restraint 1 Press and hold button C 2 Push the head restraint down Removing the Head Restraint 1 Pull the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position 2 Press and hold buttons C and D 3 Pullthe head restraint up Installing the Head Restraint Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until in locks Tilting Head Restraints The front head restraints have a tilting feature for extra comfort To tilt the head restraint do the following Seats E144727 1 Adjust the seat back to an upright driving or riding position 2 Pivotthe head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position After the head restraint reaches the forward most tilt position pivoting it forward again will then release it to the rearward un tilted position MANUAL SEATS WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver s seat or seat back when your vehicle is moving Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged Reclining the seat back can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision The manual front seats may consist of Na pj A BC D E144631 A a bar to move the seat backward and forward B a control to adjust the lumbar of the
286. ge Compartment Power Door Locks Remote Control Smart Unlocks For Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Maintenance General Information Manual Climate Control 118 Manwal Seats eerren 131 Manual TransmMiSSiOn ccccsesessessesesseeee 157 Parking Your Vehicle Recommended Shift Speeds Reverse Using the Clutch Media Hub Memory Function Easy Entry and Exit Function Linking a Pre Set Position to your Remot Control or Intelligent Access Key Saving a Pre Set Position Message Center See Information DiSPlaYS ccccscseseeeteeeeee 83 Mirrors See Heated Windows and Mirrors 126 See Windows ANd MirrOF eeseeseeseeseseeeeees 72 Mobile Communications Equipment Moonroof Bounce Back Opening and Closing the Moonrool 76 Venting the MOONLOOf cccssseseceseeseseseseseeees 76 Motorcraft Parts 286 MyFord Touch 442 MyKey Troubleshooting N Navigation cityseekr Navigation Voice Commands Point of Interest POI Categories Quick touch Buttons Setting a Destination Setting Your Navigation Preference 397 Oil Check See Engine Oil Check 2 5L 1 6L EcoBoost 2 0L EcoBoost ce 243 Opening and Closing the Hood 239 Ordering Additional Owner s literature is sccsestesedteceszssessecgatisdnageeoceteversies 223 Obtaining a French Owner s Manual
287. ger sensing system e Crash sensors and monitoring A system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 41 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment WARNING National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 in 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module Supplementary Restraints System To properly position yourself away from the airbag Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased Children and Airbags WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat inthe front seat move the seat all the way back A E14
288. ggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices Route Safety Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions 409 Appendices Potential Map Inaccuracy Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads traffic controls or driving conditions Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes Emergency Services Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations Not all emergency services such as police fire stations hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features TeleNav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions If you do not accept these terms and conditions do not break the seal of the package launch or otherwise u
289. gh AppLink you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls To Access Using the Phone Menu 1 Press the phone button to access the SYNC phone menu on screen 2 Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available applications 3 Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to select a particular app 4 Once an app is running through SYNC you can access an app s menu by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu 5 Select SYNC Media by pressing OK 6 Scroll until lt App name gt Menu is displayed i e Pandora Menu then press OK From here you can access an application s features such as Thumbs up Thumbs down etc For more information please visit www SYNCMyRide com To Access Using the Media Menu 1 Press AUX button on the center console 2 Press MENU to access the SYNC menu 3 Select SYNC Media by pressing OK 4 Then scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available applications Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to select a particular app 6 Once an app is running through SYNC you can access an app s menu by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu Select SYNC Media by pressing OK Scroll until lt App name gt Menu is displayed i e Pandora Menu then press OK From here you can access an application s features such
290. ght turns off Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Flashing warning Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire light assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality Fora description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible g It may take up to two minutes of driving When Inflating your Tires over 20 mph 32 km h for the light to turn When putting air into your tires suchasat Off after ae e your tires to the a gas station or in your garage the tire recommended inflation pressure pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires 264 Wheels and Tires How Temperature Affects your Tire Pressure The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire i
291. glare at night Auto Dimming Mirror it equipped Note Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror Mirror performance may be affected A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up SUN VISORS E138666 CS Rotate the sun visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra shade Illuminated Vanity Mirror E138667 Lift the cover to switch the lamp on MOONROOF iF cQuiPPeD WARNINGS Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave them unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves When closing the moonroof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening The sliding shade can be manually opened or closed when the moonroof is closed Pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle to close it The moonroof controls are located on the overhead console and have a one touch open and close feature To stop it during one touch operation touch the controla second time Windows and Mirrors coy B E144499 A Open B Vent C Close Opening and Closing the Moonroof To
292. go passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to thedriver s seating position options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown Example only MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB XXXI WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXXXX RIMS AT XXX kPaXX PSLCOLD ATOXXX KPaxX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO we TINTTR TIPPS R TAXLE TTR SPR XXXXX XXX XX x XX XXX XXX AXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX E142523 205 Load Carrying MFD BY BY FORD D MOTOR C 0 DATE xx xx G D ROOK XXXXXX AT A kPo PSI LPC xxx xx VIN 7000000000000000 TYPE XXX XXX nex ban AV p at nA PNBE AR KXXX SOOM B 5 004 B AVEC TRES PNEUS RIMS JANT S XXO COLD A FROID pajo MELEES COMPLIES 2000 30 gt 00 AAAA MANANA A OIN TIPPS uu j Di Tet SPR XXXXX X X OXXX XXX XX x 5000000000000 XXX TOOK AKAKKKK AK E142524 WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight
293. go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note f you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires refer to the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires refer to the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges Wheels and Tires Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged inthe tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and r
294. h an authorized D O T for North America to make sure they have the proper lamp performance light brightness light pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb illumination time Maintenance Function Trade name Headlamp high beam Halogen H7LL Headlamp low beam Halogen HILL Side marker lamp front LED Park lamp front W5W Turn lamp front PWY24W Fog lamp front H11 Tail and brake lamp high series LED Tail and brake lamp low series LED Reverse lamp 921 Turn lamp rear high series LED Turn lamp rear low series LED Side marker lamp rear LED License plate lamp W5W Trunk lamp W5W High mount brake lamp LED Side repeater lamp LED Interior lamp LED To replace these bulbs see your authorized dealer To replace all instrument panel bulbs see your authorized dealer 254 Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes CLEANING PRODUCTS For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
295. have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away From Home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www fordowner com These are some of the items that can be found online U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code Owner Manuals Maintenance Schedules Recalls Ford Extended Service Plans Ford Genuine Accessories Service specials and promotions In Canada Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing aut
296. he intermittent wipe interval Speed Dependent Wipers When your vehicle speed increases the interval between wipes will decrease AUTOWIPERS iF E uiPPeED Note Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers Note Make sure the windshield wipers are switched off before entering a car wash Note Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears If that doesn t resolve the issue install new wiper blades Note f you switch autolamps on in conjunction with autowipers your low beam headlamps will illuminate automatically when the rain sensor activates the windshield wipers continuously Note Wet road conditions can cause unexpected wiping or smearing Wipers and Washers To reduce smearing we recommend the following Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers Switch to normal or high speed wipe Switch the autowipers off E144497 A Highest sensitivity B On C Lowest sensitivity The wipers will function when moisture is detected on the windshield The rain sensor will continue to monitor the amount of moisture on the windshield and adjust the speed of the wipers automatically This feature can be switched on or off in the information display See General Information page 83 Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor With low sensitivity the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a large amount of moisture on t
297. he 150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury Note Keep the engine running to use the power point The power point is used for powering electrical devices that require up to 150 watts It is located on the rear of the center console When the indicator light located on the power point is on power point is ready to supply power off power point power supply is off ignition is not on flashing power point is in fault mode E143941 Auxiliary Power Points The power point temporarily turns off power if the 150 watt limit is exceeded It can also switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded overheated or shorted Unplug your device and switch the ignition off then on for overloading and shorting conditions Let the system cool off then turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition The power point is not designed for electric devices such as Cathode ray tube type televisions Motor loads such as vacuum cleaners electric saws and other electric power tools compressor driven refrigerators etc Measuring devices which process precise data such as medical equipment measuring equipment etc Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply microcomputer controlled electric blankets touch sensor lamps etc 141 Storage Compartments CENTER CONSOLE Press near the rear edge of the door to open it WARNING Use only sof
298. he battery is at a low state of charge Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery This message will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered Turning off unnecessary elec trical loads will allow faster battery state of charge recovery 95 Information Displays Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System Message Action Blindspot System Fault Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual Displayed when the system sensors are blocked Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible See Blind Spot Monitor page 196 Cross Traffic Vehicle Coming From X Displayed when the system detects a vehicle See Blind Spot Monitor page 196 Cross Traffic Not Avail able Sensor Blocked See Manual Displayed when the blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked See Blind Spot Monitor page 196 Cross Traffic System Fault Displays when a fault with the system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Collision Warning System Message Action Collision Warning Malfunction Collision Warning Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the colli sion warning system T
299. he battery should only be replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle When the battery is disconnected or anew battery installed the automatic transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy As a result of this the transmission may shift firmly when first driven This operation is considered normal and will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected Note Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner Follow your local authorized standards for disposal Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries 249 CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES E142463 Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES The wiper arms can be manually moved when the ignition is off This allows for ease of blade replacement and cleaning under the blades E129990 1 Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass 2 Press the locking buttons together 3 Rotate and remove the wiper blade 4 Install in the reverse order Maintenance Note Make sure that the wiper blade locks
300. he current location of the vehicle It stays in the center of the map display except when in scroll mode Scroll cursor allows you to scroll A the map the icon is fixed in the SL center of the screen The map position closest to the cursor is in a window on the top center part of the screen Address book entry default icon s indicates the location on L31 the map ofan address book entry This is the default symbol shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any method other than the map A different icon can be selected from the 22 icons available each icon can be used more than once Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the s home position Only one entry from the Address Book can be saved as Home This icon cannot be changed MyFord Touch if equipped POI Point Of Interest icons can be displayed on the map and can be turned on or off There are about 56 subcategories of POIs that can be selected to be displayed on the map one at a time Starting point indicates the A starting point of a planned route Waypoint indicates the location of a waypoint on the map The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and represents the position of the waypoint in the route at Destinationsymbol indicates the ending point of a planned route planned route No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals are available for accurate
301. he following System Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English Spanish or French Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit System Prompt Volume Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system Touch Screen Button Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen Touch Panel Button Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices made through the climate or audio system Keyboard Layout Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC format Install Applications Install any downloaded applications or view the current software licenses Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults This erases all personal settings and personal data Voice Control Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Voice Control then select from the following MyFord Touch if equipped Voice Control Interaction Mode Standard interaction mode provides more detailed inter action and guidance Advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts Confirmation Prompts Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly heard or understood your request Note Even with confirmation prompts turned off you may be asked to confirm settings occasionally Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are poss
302. he live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription For more information on Operator Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com support 2 Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination After the route download is complete the phone call is automatically ended If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation Turn by turn directions appear in the right vehicle information display in the status bar of your touchscreen system and also on the SYNC Services screen You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts When on an active route you can select Route Summary or Route Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view the Route Summary Turn List or the Route Status ETA You can also turn voice guidance on or off cancel the route or update the route If you miss a turn SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated Just say Yes when prompted and a new route is delivered to your vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation SYNC Services downloads your requested destination to the navigation system The navigation system then calculates the route and provides driving instructions See Navigation page 395 Disconnecting from SYNC Services 1 Press and hold the hang up phone button on the steering w
303. he system will be disabled Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of the radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Collision Warning Not Available Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the colli sion warning system The system will be disabled Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 96 Information Displays Doors and Locks Message Action X Door Ajar Displays when the door s listed is not completely closed and the vehicle is moving Displays when the door s listed is not completely closed Trunk ajar Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely closed Switches Inhibited Security Mode Displays when the door switches have been disabled Child Lock Malfunction Service Required Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the child locks Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Factory Keypad Code Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been XXXXX reset Driver Alert Message Action Driver Alert Warning Rest Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so Now Driver Alert Warning Rest Take a rest break soon Suggested Engine Message Action Engine Fault Service Now E
304. he windshield With high sensitivity the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a small amount of moisture on the windshield Keep the outside of the windshield clean Sensor performance will be affected if the area around the interior mirror is dirty The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt mist or flies hit the windshield 66 WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat E144498 The washers will spray for as long as you pull the lever toward you When you release the lever the wipers will operate for a short time A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid This feature can be switched on or off in the information display See General Information page 83 Lighting LIGHTING CONTROL E142449 A Off B Parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps C Headlamps High Beams E130140 Push the lever forward to switch the high beams on Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off Headlamp Flasher E142450 Pull the lever toward you slightly and release it to flash the headlamps AUTOLAMPS iF couipPeD Note t may be necessary to switch your headlamps on manually in severe weather conditions 142451 The headlamps will switch on and off automatically
305. heel 2 Say Good bye from the SYNC Services main menu MyFord Touch i equipped SYNC Services Quick Tips Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information You can save address points such as work or home You can also save favorite information like sports teams such as Detroit Lions or a news category To learn more log onto www SYNCMyRide com Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time while you are connected to SYNC TDI Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip such as a sports report and say your voice command Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone number not your VIN Vehicle Identification Number You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic Directions and Information and continue enjoying your personalized services SYNC Services Voice Commands downloaded non navigation systems press the voice button on the steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands When a route has been K SERVICES Cancel route Navigation voice off Navigation voice on Next turn Route status Route summary Services Update route Help 385 MyFord Touch if Equipped SIRIUS Travel Link If Equipped WARNING D
306. heit or Celsius Clock Settings Set time Select to set the time Set date Select to set the calendar date 12 24 hour Select to view clock time in a 12 hour mode or 24 hour mode 113 Audio System AUXILIARY INPUT JACK WARNINGS Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving For safety reasons do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while the vehicle is moving Store the portable music player ina secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion Hard objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle isin motion LINE IN E149149 The auxiliary input jack AIJ allows you to connect and play music from your portable music player through the vehicle speakers You can use any portable
307. hen the AWD system has been temporarily Disabled disabled to protect itself from overheating AWD Off Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating AWD Restored The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re installed or after the system is allowed to cool AWD Malfunction Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control Transmis Service Required sion AWD light when the AWD system is not operating prop erly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Battery and Charging System Message Action Check Charging System Displayed when the charging system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned Off Displayed when the battery management system detects an extended low voltage condition Various vehicle features will be disabled to help preserve the battery Turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage If the system voltage has recovered the disabled features will operate again as normal Turn Power Off to Save Battery Displayed when the battery management system determines that t
308. hield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Maintenance Adding Engine Coolant WARNINGS Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark Note Do not use stop leak pellets cooling system sealants or additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty Note During normal vehicle operation the engine coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red As long as the engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated this color change does not indicate the engine coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be drained the system to be flushed or the engine coolant to be replaced Do not mix different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolan
309. hill the electric parking brake may reapply the brakes within three to ten minutes Note You may notice various noises when you apply and release the electric parking brake This is normal and no cause for concern Parking ona hill vehicles witha manual transmission If you park your vehicle facing uphill move the transmission selector lever to position 1 and turn the steering wheel away from the curb If you park your vehicle facing downhill move the transmission selector lever to position R and turn the steering wheel toward the curb Applying the electric parking brake WARNING If the brake system warning lamp T does not illuminate or flashes there could be a problem with your electric parking brake Have the system checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Note The brake system warning lamp will illuminate for ten seconds if the ignition is turned off after the electric parking brake has been applied or the electric parking brake has been applied after the ignition has been turned off Note The electric parking brake will not automatically apply You must apply the electric parking brake using the electric parking brake switch r e E147230 Pull the switch up to apply the electric parking brake The brake system warning lamp will illuminate to confirm that the electric parking brake has been applied See Information Displays page 83 Applying the electric parking brake
310. hments Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions Center Seating Use WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 inches 28 centimeters center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches 46 centimeters apart A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing canonly be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to your vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being inju
311. horized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 Ifyou require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center Customer Assistance In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center Vehicle Identification Number Your telephone number home and business The name of the authorized dealer and city where located The vehicle s current odometer reading Insome states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s appli
312. ht sensor the BLIS telltale will illuminate and a message will appear in the information display All other system faults will only be displayed by a message in the information display Switching the Systems Off and On One or both systems can be switched off temporarily by using the information display control See General Information page 83 When the BLIS is switched off you will not receive alerts and a telltale illuminates in the information display Note The CTA system always switches on whenever the ignition is switched on However the BLIS system will remember the last selected on or off setting One or both systems cannot be switched off when MyKey is used See Principle of Operation page 49 Driving Aids One or both systems can also be switched off permanently at your authorized dealer Once switched off switching it back on must also be done at your authorized dealer STEERING Electric Power Steering WARNING Obtain immediate service if a system error is detected You may not notice any difference in the feel of your steering but a serious condition may exist Failure to do so may result in loss of steering control Note Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power assisted steering system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation of the electronic system
313. iary Input Jack 114 Auxiliary Power Points 140 110 Volt AC Power Point 140 12 Volt DC Power Point 140 LOCATON Sirna 140 AWD See All Wheel Drive ecssesessesesseseeneeees 163 Blind Spot MONItOS ccescesesseseseseeeseesesees 196 Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert 196 Booster Seats Sa Types of Booster Sea A Brake Fluid CHECK ccccscscesessesesesesseseesesens Index Brakes ne 168 General INFOrMAtION 0 168 Br AkiNg IN cccesessesesseseesessesessesseseeeseeeseeseses 216 Bulb Specification Chart 253 Cabin Air Filter cescssesessesesesesseseeseseees 127 California Proposition 65 0 0 Capacities and Specifications 286 Technical Specifications cece 290 Car Wash See Cleaning the Exterior 255 Center Console 142 Changing a BUID ce 252 Lamp Assembly Condensation Replacing a Reverse Lamp Bulb Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs Replacing the License Plate Lamp Replacing the Tail Brake High Mount Brake Lamp and Turn Signal Lamp Changing a Road Whe Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information Stowing the flat tire Tire Change Procedure Changing the 12V Battery Changing the Engine Air Filter 2 5L 1 6L EcoBoost 2 0L EcoBoost Changing the Wiper Blades 249 Checking MyKey System Status 50 Checking the Wiper Blades 249 Child Restraint and Safety Belt MAaIiNT
314. ible results from your voice commands If these are turned off the system simply makes a best guess at your request Phone Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands If these are turned off the system simply makes a best guess at your request Voice Control Volume Allows you to adjust the voice volume level Media Player Press the Settings icon gt Sett ings gt Media Player then select from the following 350 MyFord Touch i equipped Media Player Autoplay With this feature on the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection and you can listen to music which has already been randomly indexed during the indexing process With this feature off the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source Bluetooth Devices Select to connect disconnect add or delete a device You can also set a device as your favorite so that the system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle Gracenote Database Info Allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database Gracenote Mgmt With this feature on metadata information is pulled from the Gracenote Database for your music files This overrides information from your device This feature defaults to off Cover Art Priority With this feature on cover art is pulled from the Gracenote Database fo
315. ice or repair Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes For U S only if equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See SYNC page 298 Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as Howvarious systems inyour vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was travelling and Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur Int
316. icle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery Check and recharge as necessary Keep connections clean If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Note f battery cables are disconnected it will be necessary to reset memory features Brakes Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released Tires Maintain recommended air pressure Miscellaneous Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust Move vehicles at least 25 feet 8 meters every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion Vehicle Care Removing Vehicle From Storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the following Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces Check windshield wipers for any deterioration Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice squirrel nests Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label Check brake pedal operation Drive the vehicle 15 feet 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up Check fluid level
317. icle keeps running great Multi point Inspection Accessory drive belt s Half shaft dust boots Battery performance Horn operation Clutch operation if equipped Radiator cooler heater and A C hoses Engine air filter Suspension components for leaks or damage Exhaust system Steering and linkage Exterior lamps and hazard warning system operation Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure Fluid levels fill if necessary Windshield for cracks chips or pits For oil and fluid leaks Washer spray and wiper operation Brake coolant recovery reservoir automatic transmission and window washer If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister Replace as needed 422 Scheduled Maintenance Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle It is your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle You know what has been checked what is okay as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention The multi point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great Normal Scheduled Maintenance Intelligent Oil Life Monitor Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil
318. ide regarding audio adjustments During a call can hear the other person but they cannot hear me Possible phone malfunction Try turning off the device resetting the device removing the device s battery then trying again SYNC is not able to down load my phonebook This is a phone dependent feature Possible phone malfunc tion Go to the website to review your phone s compatibility Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s then trying again Try pushing your phone book contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website The system says Phone book downloaded but my phonebook in SYNC is empty or is missing contacts Limitations on your phone s capability Try pushing your phone book contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card try moving them to the device memory Remove any pictures or special ring tones associ ated with the missing contact I m having trouble connecting my phone to SYNC This is aphone dependent feature Possible phone malfunc tion 329 Go to the website to review your phone s compatibility Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s then trying again SYNC Phone Issues Possible Cause s Possible Soluti
319. ile the system is on Heated seats if equipped Turn the driver or passenger heated seats on and off See Heated Seats page 134 J Recirculated air Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When recirculated air is selected the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may also reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce the possibility of fogging K Fan speed indicators Illuminate to indicate fan speed AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL A B C DEFG H E144492 N M L J l 119 Climate Control Driver temperature control Turn to increase or decrease the air temperature for the driver side of the vehicle This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged A C Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes Use A C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Fan speed control Press to decrease the volume of air circulated in your vehicle Fan speed indicator Uminates to indicate fan speed All of the fan speed indicators turn off whenever the fan speed is controlled automatically Airflow distribution control Pres
320. in air filter replacement Engine air filter and cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter Engine Coolant Change Record Initial change Six years or 100000 miles 160000 kilometers whichever comes first After initial change Every three years or 50000 miles 80000 kilometers Q Mutipoint inspection recommended CT Multi Q Mutipoint inspection recommended CT inspection recommended Oso O Oso O Scheduled Maintenance O Engine hours optional Q wmutepoint inspection recommended Multi point inspection recommended O Multi point inspection recommended O O Signature 435 Scheduled Maintenance O Engine hours optional O Multi point inspection recommended O Signature O Repair Order 436 Index A A C See Climate Control About This Manuaal Protecting the Environment ABS SOC BRAKES aenn iiaii Ar EER 168 ABS driving hints See Hints on Driving With Anti Lock Exterior style Interior style Lifestyle Peace of mind Accessories See Replacement Parts Recomme endatloN raniona TI ACC See Using Adaptive Cruise Control 184 Active Park Assist Automatic Steering into Parking Deactivating the Park Assist Feature Troubleshooting the System U
321. in airbags its fuses the A B or C pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing side curtain airbags Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNINGS All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and side curtain airbag is provided To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the side curtain airbag If the side curtain airbags have deployed the side curtain airbags will not function again The side curtain airbags including the A B and C pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the side curtain airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The side curtain airbags will deploy during significant side collisions The side curtain airbags are mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats In certain lateral collisions the side curtain airbags on the impacted side of the vehicle will be activated The side curtain airbags are designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions The system consists of the following E75004 Supplementary Restraints System Side curtain airbags fitted above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label
322. in and change it back to your preferred dealer and retrieve the report I m unable to submit a report This could be due to your phone s compatibility Bad signal strength Your phone may not be activated on the website Update your mobile number in your account on the website Make sure you have full signal strength and that your Bluetooth volume level has been turned up Try deleting your phone and performing a clean pairing heard a commercial when tried to use Traffic Direc tions and Information The phone in use is not activated Your phone has ID blocker active This is a free feature but you must first register online to use it Turn off ID blocker on your phone as the system recog nizes you by your phone number Make sure the currently connected phone is the same one that is registered on your SyncMyRide account 332 SYNC Voice Command Issues SYNC does not understand what am saying Possible Cause s You may be using the wrong voice commands You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time Possible Solution s Review the phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections Be aware that SYNC s microphone is either in your rear view mirror or in the headliner just above the windshield SYNC does not understand the name of asong or artist You may b
323. in low light situations or during inclement weather The headlamps will remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off You can adjust the time delay using the information display controls See Information Displays page 83 67 Lighting Note f you switch autolamps on in Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps conjunction with autowipers low beam headlamps will illuminate automatically A B when the rain sensor activates the windshield wipers continuously INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER Note f you disconnect the battery or it becomes discharged the illuminated components will switch to the maximum setting E142452 Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps A Press repeatedly or press and hold to dim B Press repeatedly or press and hold to brighten HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY After you switch the ignition off you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you You will hear a short tone The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or Press repeatedly or press and hold until switching the ignition on the desired level is reached E132712 DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS cir EQUIPPED WARNING Always remember to switch your headlamps on in low light situations or during inclement weather The system does not activa
324. informing you to label this key as a MyKey The key will be restricted at the next start The key is successfully programmed Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys You can program optional settings for the key s Refer to Programming Changing optional settings Programming Changing Optional Settings All programmed keys can be cleared within the same key cycle in which a key was programmed otherwise an admin key is required to clear the keys See Clearing All MyKeys page 50 You can access the optional settings through the information display control 1 Turn the ignition on using an admin key 2 Access the main menu and select Settings then MyKey 3 Use the arrow buttons to get to an optional feature 4 Press OK or gt to scroll through settings 5 Press OK or gt to make a selection CLEARING ALL MYKEYS All programmed MyKeys can be cleared within the same key cycle in which a MyKey was created otherwise an admin key is required to clear the keys To clear all MyKeys which removes all restrictions and returns them to admin key status use the information display control to do the following 1 Access the main menu and select Settings then MyKey 2 Scroll to Clear All and press the OK button 3 Hold the OK button until ALLMYKEYS CLEARED is displayed CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS The information display control displays information about keys programmed t
325. ing the display indicates that the system is updating When complete SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings This selection does not erase your indexed information phonebook call history text messages and paired devices Press OK to select and then press OK again when Restore Defaults appears in the display 2 Press OK to confirm Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on SYNC all phonebook call history text messages and all paired devices and return to the factory default settings Application Download new software applications if available and then load the desired applications through your USB port See the web site for more information Return Exit the current menu Use the website at any time to check your SYNC TROUBLESHOOTING phone s compatibility register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an Your SYNC system is easy to use However on line chat during certain hours Visit should questions arise please refer to the www SYNCMyRide com tables below www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca for more information 328 SYNC Phone Issues A lot of background noise during a phone call Possible Cause s The audio control settings on your phone may be affecting SYNC perform ance Possible Solution s Review your phone s user gu
326. ing file size is reached Users who have Bluetooth phones that are capable of streaming audio can press SEEK to play the previous or next track When you have already connected a device to the USB port you cannot access the line in feature Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately Media Settings Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Autoplay settings Once these selections are turned on they remain on until turned off Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately Press OK to select and then scroll to choose from Shuffle Repeat or Autoplay Mobile Apps Interact with SYNC capable mobile applications on your smartphone System Settings Access Bluetooth Device menu listings add connect set as primary on off delete as well as Advanced menu listings prompts languages defaults master reset install application and system information Exit Media Menu Press OK to exit the media menu 324 SYNC Accessing Your Play Menu 2 Press AUX and then MENU to enter This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist album genre playlist track similar music or even to explore what is on your USB device 1 Make sure that your device is plugged the Media menu 3 Scroll to select the Play menu then press OK If there are no media files
327. ing on the seat Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above e To know if the front passenger N sensing system is operating properly See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 41 If the airbag readiness light is lit do the following Supplementary Restraints System The driver and adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering with the seat please take the following steps to remove the obstruction Pull the vehicle over Turn the vehicle off Driver and adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat Remove the obstruction s if found Restart the vehicle Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is no onger illuminated If the airbag readiness light remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer If it is necessary to modify a
328. ing onthe child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two lower anchors located where your vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Child Safety E142535 Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol E144054 The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the symbols as shown Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attac
329. ing with HD Radio technology Every station is independently owned and operated These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate 360 MyFord Touch i equipped Potential Station Issues Echo stutter skip or repeat in audio Increase or decrease in audio volume Cause Poor time alignment by the radio broadcaster Action None Broadcast issue Sound fading or blending in and out The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio None Reception issue that may clear up as you continue to drive Audio mute delay when selecting HD2 HD3 multicast preset or Direct Tune The digital multicast is not available until the HD Radio broadcast is decoded Once decoded the audio is avail able None This is normal beha vior Wait until the audio is available Cannot access HD2 HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or froma direct tune The previously stored multicast preset or direct tune is not available in your current reception area None The station is not available in your current location Text information does not match currently playing audio Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Fill out the station issue form at website listed below No text information shown for currently selected frequency Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Fill out the station issue form at websi
330. inspection after off road use is also recommended Age WARNING Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of
331. intenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear Wiper blades Spark plugs except California Clutch disc Ford Extended Service Plan ESP Brake pads and linings Shock absorbers Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest Free Finance Options Available Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportunity For More Information PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITHA FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN To learn more call our Ford ESP specialists at 800 367 3377 and don t forget to ask about our interest free payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time your pre approved with no credit checks no hassles Or complete the information below and mail to Ford ESP P O Box 8072 Royal Oak MI 48068 0039 Name PLEASE PRINT ADDRESS APT CITY STATE ZIP E MAIL SERVICE PLANS CANADAONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Depending on the
332. io display The display indicates when the pairing is successful and asks you if you want to download your phonebook Depending on your phone s capability you may be prompted with additional options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s user guide and visit the website Pairing Subsequent Phones Note Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that the transmission is in position P 1 Press the phone corner of the touchscreen Settings BT Devices then Add Device 2 Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s user guide if necessary 3 When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC on the screen The display indicates when the pairing is successful The system asks you if you want to download your phonebook Depending on your phone s capability you may be prompted with additional options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s user guide and visit the website Making Calls Press the voice button When us prompted say Call lt name gt or say Dial the desired number To end the call or exit phone mode press and hold the phone button Receiving Calls During an incoming call an audible tone sounds Call information appears in the display if it is available Accept the call by pressing wy Accept on the touchscreen or by pressing this
333. io frequency receiver 33 20A Radio Active noise control 34 30A Run start bus fuse 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 circuit breaker 35 5A Restraints control module 36 15A All wheel drive relay Auto dimming rear view mirror 37 15A Not used spare 38 30A Not used Micro fuse 7Dual micro fuse 238 Maintenance GENERAL INFORMATION Have your vehicle serviced regular maintain its roadworthiness and value There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy See Scheduled Maintenance page 420 If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle ytohelp resale Ford Precautions Do not work on a hot engine Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts
334. ip marks or droplets Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are Water puddle inside the lamp Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs For any front bulb replacement see your authorized dealer Replacing the Tail Brake High Mount Brake Lamp and Turn Signal Lamp Bulbs These lamps are designed with LED light sources For replacement see your authorized dealer Replacing a Reverse Lamp Bulb 1 Make sure the lighting control is in the off position 2 Open the trunk deck lid E145777 3 Remove the push pins and reposition the inner body side trim Maintenance yA r E145778 4 Remove the three lamp assembly nuts 5 Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle E145779 6 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove the bulb holder E145780 7 Remove the bulb from the bulb holder Install the new bulb in reverse order Replacing the License Plate Lamp Bulb E72789 1 Carefully release the spring clip 2 Remove the lamp 3 Remove the bulb Install the new bulb in reverse order BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked wit
335. ire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Glossary of Tire Terminology Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Wheels and Tires Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry amaximum load at 35 psi 37 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure Cold tire pressure The tire p
336. is a cancer causing agent When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle Always turn off the vehicle before refueling 150 Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed calla physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin clothing or both promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and wat
337. ition on The factory set code will display for a few seconds Note The code may not display until after any other warning messages first display With Intelligent Access Keys Note You will need to have two programmed intelligent access keys for this procedure To display the factory set code in the information display 1 Place the first programmed key in the backup slot inside the center console 2 Press the START STOP button once and wait a few seconds 3 Press the START STOP button again and remove the key 4 Insert the second programmed key into the backup slot then press the START STOP button The factory set code will appear in the information display for a few seconds Note The code may not display until after any other warning messages first display Locks INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE WARNINGS Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child s reach Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury Children should be taught not to play in vehicles Do not leave children unreliable T adults or animals unattended in the vehicle On hot days the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries including brain damage Small children are par
338. ition the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt E142529 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together Child Safety D E142530 E142875 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt 5 To put the retractor in the automatic portions together route the tongue locking mode grasp the shoulder through the child seat according to the portion of the belt and pull downward child seat manufacturer s instructions until all of the belt is pulled out Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted Note The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6 buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear asnap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it ig E142531 E142533 2 Child Safety 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with
339. ive the source code audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav c remove from the TeleNav Software or alter any of TeleNav s or its suppliers trademarks trade names logos patent or copyright notices or other notices or markings d distribute sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software or e use the TeleNav Software in any manner that i infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party ii violates any law statute ordinance or regulation including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming privacy consumer and child protection obscenity or defamation or iii is harmful threatening abusive harassing tortuous defamatory vulgar obscene libelous or otherwise objectionable and f lease rent out or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav Appendices 4 Disclaimers To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law in no event will TeleNav its licensors and suppliers or agents or employees of any of the foregoing be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software TeleNav also does not wa
340. iver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt Usage sensors Driver s seat position sensor Front passenger sensing system Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp Front crash severity sensors Restraints Control Module with impact and safing sensors Restraint system warning light and backup tone The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How Does the Personal Safety System Work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module During a crash the Restraints Control Module may activate the safety belt pretensioners and may activate either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions Supplementary Restraints System PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury froma deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts
341. l brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Note Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels even under normal driving conditions Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise See Warning Lamps and Indicators page 79 D See Warning Lamps and Indicators page 79 Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes Brake Over Accelerator In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power If you experience this condition apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop Turn the engine off shift to position P and apply the parking brake and then inspect the accelerator pedal for any interferences If none are found and the condition persists have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer 168 Brake Assist Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pe
342. l genres Play Repeat off Browse all playlists Play album lt name gt Repeat one Browse all podcasts Play artist lt name gt Shuffle Browse all songs Play audiobook lt name gt Shuffle album Browse artist lt name gt Play author lt name gt Shuffle off Browse audiobook Play composer lt name gt What s this lt name gt Browse author lt name gt Play folder lt name gt Help 374 MyFord Touch i Equipped A V Inputs Note For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable media player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable media player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable media player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion COD E142622 Your A V inputs allow you to connect an auxiliary audio video source e g game systems or personal camcorders by connecting RCA cords not included to these input jacks The jacks are yellow red and white and are located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel You can also use the A V inputs as an auxiliary input jack AIJ to play music from your portable media player over your vehicle s speakers Plug in your one eighth inch 3 5 millimeter RCA adapter into the two l
343. l the accelerator gearshift and brakes The system visually and audibly instructs you to park the vehicle The system may not function correctly if something passes between the front bumper and the parking space i e a pedestrian or cyclist or if the edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high from the ground i e a bus tow truck or flatbed truck Note The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections Note The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves The system should not be used if a foreign object i e bike rack or trailer is attached to the front or rear of the vehicle or at another location close to the sensors an overhanging object i e surfboard is attached to the roof the front bumper or side sensors are damaged i e in a collision or obstructed by a foreign object i e front bumper cover a mini spare tire is in use Using Active Park Assist The touch screen displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it s searching for a parking space Use the turn signal to indicate which side of the vehicle you want the system to search on Press the button located on the center console near the gearshift lever Note f the turn signal is not on the system automatically searches on the vehicle s passenger side nS n mb Nn E130107 176 Parking Aids When a suitabl
344. label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING Position the safety belt height adjuster so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision E145664 Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height pull the button and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place Safety Belts SAFETY BELT WARNINGLAMP AND INDICATOR CHIME Conditions of operation This lamp illuminates and an th audible warning will sound if the WA driver s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle s ignition is turned on If Then The driver s safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position The driver s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on posi tion SAFETY BELT MINDER Belt Minder This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and i
345. late it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire Rotation Note f your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Wheels and Tires Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembl
346. lb 36 kg and upward to 100 lb 45 kg if recom mended by your child restraint manufac turer Use a belt positioning booster seat Larger children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt positioning booster seat generally children who are at least 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall or greater than 80 lb 36 kg or 100 lb 45 kg if recom mended by child restraint manufacturer Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest and seat back upright Child Safety You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 36 kilograms Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in arear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position See Front Passenger Sensing System page 36 CHILD SEAT POSITIONING WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child
347. le It will also illuminate momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on or begins to flash at any time have the system checked by your authorized dealer 81 Parking Lamps Pe twill illuminate when you switch 0 0z the parking lamps on Powertrain Fault Illuminates when a powertrain or an AWD fault has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Service Engine Soon If the service engine soon indicator light stays illuminated te after the engine is started it indicates that the On Board Diagnostics system OBD has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emissions control system Refer to On board diagnostics OBD in the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more information about having your vehicle serviced See Emission Control System page 154 If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately Note Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter or other vehicle components The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned on prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing
348. le and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving ona significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is nota substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels al
349. le that is blocking or shadowing y y 8 the lane or vehicle conditions e g Quick braking poor headlamp illumination Fast acceleration See Troubleshooting for additional a Using the turn signal indicator information i Evasive steering maneuver Green Indicates that the system is available or ready to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side s Troubleshooting Why is the feature not available line markings are gray when I can see the lane markings on the road Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature Sun is shining directly into the camera lens Quick intentional lane change Staying too close to the lane marking Driving at high speeds in curves Previous feature activation happened within the last one second Ambiguous lane markings mainly in construction zones Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa Why is the feature not available line markings are gray when I can see the lane markings on the road Sudden offset in lane markings ABS or AdvanceTrac activation Camera blockage due to dirt grime fog frost or water on the windshield Too close to the vehicle in front of you 195 Driving Aids Whyis the feature not available line markings are gray when I can see the lane markings on the road Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa Standing water o
350. less than age twelve 12 and between 40 pounds 18 kilograms and 80 pounds 36 kilograms and upward to 100 pounds 45 kilograms if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 36 kilograms Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat Child Safety LO E142595 Can the child sit all the way back against your vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt Types of Booster Seats E68924 Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat E7071
351. lete or upload your phonebook Roaming Warning Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode Wireless amp Internet Your system has a Wi Fi feature which creates a wireless network within your vehicle thereby allowing other devices i e personal computers or phones in your vehicle to speak to each other share files play games etc Using this Wi Fi feature everyone in your vehicle can also gain access the internet if you have a USB mobile broadband connection inside the vehicle your phone supports PAN personal area networking and if you are parked outside of a wireless hotspot 353 Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Wireless amp Internet then select from the following MyFord Touch it equipped Wi Fi Wi Fi Settings Wi Fi Network Client Mode Turn the Wi Fi feature on and off in your vehicle Make sure it is turned on for connectivity purposes Choose a Wireless Network Use a previously stored wireless network You can categorize by alphabetical listing priority and signal strength You can also choose to search for a network connect to a network disconnect from a network receive more information prioritize a network or delete a network Gateway Access Point Mode Make SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer by turning this feature on This forms the local area network within the vehicle for things such as game playing file transfer internet bro
352. level Maintenance Recycled Engine Coolant Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Severe Climates If you drive in extremely cold climates It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the coolant concentration above 50 A coolant concentration of 60 will provide improved freeze point protection Engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage If you drive in extremely hot climates It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the coolant concentration to 40 A coolant concentration of 40 will provide improved overheat protection Engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection 246 What you Should Know About Fail Safe Cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred
353. ll be asked to submit their original receipts Vehicles Sold In Canada Getting Roadside Assistance Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 Vehicles Sold In Canada Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In Canada the card is found in the warranty information in the glove box Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U S coverage Please refer to your warranty information or visit our website at www ford ca for information on Canadian services and benefits Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information call 1 800 665 2006 or visit our website at www ford ca HAZARD WARNINGFLASHERS Note With extended use the flashers may run down your battery The hazard flasher control is UN located on the instrument panel by the radio Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off FUEL CUT OFF SWITCH WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision In the event of a mod
354. ller name and ID if supported by your phone You can press View to view the text message Listen for SYNC to read the message to you When You Select You Can Bluetooth Devices Connect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a favorite Bluetooth On Off Turn Bluetooth on or off Do not disturb 91 Assist Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring in the vehicle cabin With this feature turned on text message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside the cabin Turn 911 Assist on or off See Information page 382 Phone ringer Select what ring tone you would like to hear when you receive a call Choose from possible system ring tones your currently paired phone s ring tone a beep text to speech or if you would like the notification to be silent Text message notification Select how you would like to be notified when you receive a text message if supported by your phone Choose from possible system alert tones text to speech or silent Internet Data Connection Use this screen to make adjustments to your internet data connection Select to make your connection profile with the PAN personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to make adjustments to your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press for more information 380 MyFord T
355. lligent Access Keys If Equipped If you shut off the engine and leave the ignition in the on or accessory mode the ignition will shut off after 30 minutes Luggage Compartment E144402 Press the release button above the license plate Your vehicle must be unlocked or have an intelligent access transmitter within 3 feet 1 meter of the trunk KEYLESS ENTRY iF couiprep SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD The keypad is located near the driver s window It is invisible until touched and then it lights up so you can see and touch the appropriate buttons Note f you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad the unlock function may not work Re enter your entry code more slowly Locks E138637 You can use the keypad to lock or unlock the doors release the trunk recall memory seat and mirror positions if equipped program and erase user codes arm and disarm the anti theft alarm The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code The code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create up to five of your own 5 digit personal entry codes Programming a Personal Entry Code To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Press 1 2 on the keypad within five seconds Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other Press 1 2
356. lluminating the safety belt warning light when the driver s or front passenger s seat is occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled The safety belt warning light illuminates 1 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature 30 Safety Belts If Then The driver s and front passenger s safety belts are buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The Belt Minder feature will not activate The driver s or front passenger s safety belt is not buckled when the vehicle has reached at least 6 mph 9 7 km h and 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The Belt Minder feature is activa
357. load Direct Tune Enter Enter the desired station number when prompted Press HD Radio Information If Available Note HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM FM radio Your system has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts where available in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free crystal clear audio and no static or distortion For more information and a guide to available stations and programming please visit www hdradio com When this feature is enabled and you are tuned to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology you may notice the following indicators on your screen E142616 The HD Radio logo blinks when a digital station is being acquired and is solid when digital audio is playing When this logo is available you may also see Title and Artist fields on screen The multicast indicator appears in FM mode only if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts The numbers that are highlighted signify available digital channels where new or different content is available HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts Any additional multicast stations HD2 through HD7 are only broadcast digitally TAG allows you to save a song to
358. lock if the vehicle has been electronically locked after the ignition is turned off and before the driver s door is opened Enabling or Disabling Note The autolock and autounlock features can be enabled or disabled independently of each other These features can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer for in the information display See General Information page 83 Illuminated Entry The interior lamps and select exterior lamps will illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the doors Locks The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if the ignition is on the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or after 25 seconds of illumination The lights will not turn off if they have been turned on with the dimmer control or any door is open Illuminated Exit The interior lamps and select exterior lamps will illuminate when all doors are closed the ignition is turned off and the key is removed from the ignition integrated keyhead transmitter only The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and 25 seconds elapse the key is inserted in the ignition integrated keyhead transmitter only the START STOP button is pressed intelligent access key only Battery Saver If the courtesy lamps dome lamps or headlamps are left on the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Inte
359. low the TPMS to continue to function properly The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Wheels and Tires Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System E142549 Note Fach road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if
360. ly update new time zones You can also turn the outside air temperature display on and off When the outside air temperature is displayed it appears at the top center of the touchscreen next to the time and date Once you update any settings they are automatically saved Display You can make adjustments to the touchscreen display through the touchscreen or by pressing the voice button on your steering wheel controls and when prompted say Display settings To access and make adjustments using the touchscreen press the Settings icon gt Display Brightness allows you to make the screen display brighter or dimmer Mode allows you to set the screen to acertain brightness or have the system automatically change based on the outside light level If you select AUTO or NIGHT you have the options of turning the display s Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature Edit Wallpaper You can have your touchscreen display the default photo or upload your own Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen Wallpaper Note You cannot load photos directly from your camera You must access the photos from either your USB mass storage device or from an SD card Note Photographs with extremely large dimensions i e 2048 x 1536 may not be compatible and appear as a blank black image on the display Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos To access press the Settings i
361. m Off Note The set speed memory is erased when you switch off the system Press and release OFF or turn off the ignition Detection Issues The radar sensor has a limited field of vision It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations The lead vehicle graphic will not illuminate if a vehicle is not detected in front of you Cruise Control op lo B cp Sai 71621 Detection issues can occur A When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front B With vehicles that edge into your lane These vehicles can only be detected once they have moved fully into your lane C There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road In these cases the system may brake late or unexpectedly The driver should stay alert and intervene when necessary If the front end of the vehicle is hit or damaged the radar sensing zone may be altered causing missed or false vehicle detections See your authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation System Not Available Conditions which can cause the system to deactivate or prevent the system from activating when requested include a blocked sensor high brake temperature a failure in the system or a related system Blocked Sensor WARNINGS Do not use the system when towing a trailer with brake contr
362. mage keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R Reverse When the transmission is shifted out of R Reverse the feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again Selectable settings for this feature are OFF Level 1 Level 2 or Level 3 Press the up and down arrows to change the view The selection level appears between the buttons i e Level 1 The default setting for the manual zoom is OFF Rear Camera Delay The camera image will be displayed upon shifting out of R Reverse until the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph 8 km h This will occur when the rear camera delay feature is on or until the radio button is selected Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF 182 Cruise Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal USING CRUISE CONTROL WARNINGS Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic on winding roads or when the road surface is slippery When you are going downhill your speed may increase above the set speed The system will not apply the brakes Change down a gear to assist the system in maintaining the set speed Note Cruise control will disengage if the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed while driving uphill
363. many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance Itis critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical Owner Checks and Services Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed every month or at six month intervals Check Every Month Engine oil level Function of all interior and exterior lights Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure Windshield washer fluid level Scheduled Maintenance Check Every Six Months Battery connections Clean if necessary Body and door drain holes for obstructions Clean if necessary Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength Door weatherstrips for wear Lubricate if necessary Hinges latches and outside locks for proper operation Lubricate if necessary Parking brake for proper operation Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function Safety warning lamps brake ABS airbag and safety belt for operation Washer spray and wiper operation Clean or replace blades as necessary Multi point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems We recommend the following multi point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help ensure your veh
364. mation like sports teams or a news category To learn more log onto www SYNCMyRide com Press the voice button at any time while you are connected to SYNC TDI Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip such as a sports report wait for the listening tone then say your voice command Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone number not your VIN Vehicle Identification Number You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic Directions and Information and continue enjoying your personalized services 319 SYNC SYNC Services Quick Tips You can even access your account outside the vehicle Just use the number on your phone s call history Traffic and Directions features do not function properly but Information services and the 411 connect and text message features are available SYNC AppLink Note Your smartphone must be paired and connected to SYNC to access AppLink Note j Phone users need to connect the phone to the USB port in order to start the application It is recommended to lock your iPhone after starting an application Note The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch system Note Depending on your display type you can access AppLink from the media menu the phone menu or by using voice commands Once an app is running throu
365. ment If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement you are not permitted to install copy use resell or transfer the Data If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement and have not installed copied or used the Data you must contact your retailer or NAVTEQ North America LLC NT within thirty 30 days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price To contact NT please visit www navteg com The Data is provided for your personal internal use only and may not be resold It is protected by copyright and is subject to the following terms this End User License Agreement and conditions which are agreed to by you on the one hand and NAVTEQ North America LLC NT and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers on the other hand The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada Queen s Printer for Ontario Canada Post Corporation GeoBase Appendices NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service to publish and sell ZIP 4 information United States Postal Service 2009 Prices are not established controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS United States Postal Service USPS and ZIP 4 The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de
366. ment log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur The cellular profile media device index and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information SYNC System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle s SYNC module Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent a court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada For further privacy information see the sections on 911 Assist if equipped Vehicle Health Report if equipped and Traffic Directions and Information if equipped USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features using voice commands This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you Say Helpful Hints Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible Wind nois
367. mplete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www siriusxm com in the United States www siriuscanada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute ence Satellite radio signal interfer Your display may show ACQUIRING to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute Audio System SIRIUS Satellite Radio Service Note S RIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes BW xm SATELLITE RADIO E142593 Troubleshooting SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your fac
368. music player designed for use with headphones Your audio extension cable must have male 1 8th inch 3 5 millimeter connectors at each end 1 Make sure the vehicle radio and portable music player are turned off and the transmission is in position P 2 Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the AU 3 Turnon the radio Select either a tuned FM station or a CD 4 Adjust the volume as desired 5 Turnonyour portable music player and adjust its volume to half its maximum level 6 Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display You should hear music from your device even if it is low 7 Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the volume level of the FM station or CD Do this by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls USB PORT iF equipPeD J LINE IN t E149148 Audio System The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks and charge devices if supported See SYNC page 298 MEDIA HUB iF eouipPeD The media hub is located in the center console and has the following features O90 i E142605 A A V inputs B SD card slot C USB ports Satellite Radio Reception Factors See MyFord Touch page 335 SATELLITE RADIO iF equipped SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a co
369. n To erase all spoken digits say Clear or press and hold the left arrow button To end the call press and hold the phone button Receiving Calls When receiving a call you can Answer the call by pressing the phone button Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button Ignore the call by doing nothing Phone Options during an Active Call During an active call you have additional menu features which become available such as putting a call on hold joining calls etc Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options 305 SYNC To access When Active Call Menu is selected Press Menu during an active call press OK Scroll to cycle through the following options When You Select You Can Mute Call Mute the call Privacy Switch a call from an active hands free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation Press OK when Privacy on off appears The display indicates In Privacy and the system transfers your call Call Hold Put an active call on hold Press OK when Hold on off appears To answer another call at this time press the phone button Enter Tones Enter tones such as numbers for passwords Scroll until the desired number appears in the display then press OK a tone sounds as confirmation Repeat as necessary Join Calls Join two separate calls SYNC supports a maximum of three callers on a multi party conference call
370. n advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center See Getting the Services You Need page 219 SIDE AIRBAGS WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seat backs of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact witha deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNINGS Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seat backs of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated The airbag was designed
371. n be left on the ground when towed in this fashion FWD vehicles can also be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment however the front wheels must be placed ona dolly to prevent damage to the transmission All wheel drive AWD vehicles must be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to prevent damage to the transmission AWD system or vehicle TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Emergency Towing Inthe event your vehicle becomes disabled without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle it can be flat towed all wheels on the ground regardless of the powertrain transmission configuration under the following conditions The vehicle is facing forward so that it is towed in a forward direction The transmission gear shift lever is placed in position N If the transmission gear shift lever cannot be moved to position N it may need to be overridden See Transmission page 157 Maximum speed is 35 mph 56 km h Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 kilometers Recreational Towing Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle See Climate Control page 118 Towing Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational RV towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome These guidelines are designed to
372. n features destination mode and map mode To set a destination press the green corner of your touchscreen then the Dest button when it appears See Settinga destination later in this chapter To view the navigation map and the vehicle s current location touch the green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen or press Dest then Map See Map mode later in this chapter Setting a Destination Press the green corner of your touchscreen then the Dest button when it appears Choose any of the following Destination My Home Street Address Favorites Intersection Previous Destinations City Center Point of Interest POI Map Emergency Previous Starting Point Freeway Entrance Exit Latitude Longitude 1 Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields in any order For address destination entry the Go button appears once all the necessary information has been entered Pressing the Go button makes the address location appear on the map If you choose Previous Destination the last 20 destinations you have selected appear 2 Select Set as Dest to make this your destination You can also choose to set this as a waypoint have the system route to this point on the way to your current destination or save it as a favorite Any Avoid Areas selections are also considered in route calculation 3 Choose from up to three different types of routes then sele
373. n revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine During SelectShift Automatic transmission SST use the currently selected gear will appear in the display Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the level indicator will be in the normal range If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool Intelligent AWD if equipped displays power distribution between the front and rear wheels More power to either front or rear wheels will be displayed by more area filled in Trip1 amp 2 Choose between the standard TAN or enhanced trip display 87 Information Displays Trip1 amp 2 Standard display Enhanced display Trip Odometer X X Trip Timer X Average Fuel Fuel Used xj XxX Xx Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information Trip Odometer shows the accumulated trip distance Trip Timer timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle is restarted Average Fuel shows the average fuel economy for a given trip Fuel Used shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip Fuel Economy Use the left right arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display
374. n the road Faint lane markings partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads Lane width too narrow or too wide Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement When driving on tight roads or on uneven roads Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always as expected in the Aid or Aid Alert mode High cross winds Large road crown Rough roads grooves shoulder drop offs Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure If the tires have been exchanged including snow tires or the suspension has been modified BLIND SPOT MONITOR Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert ir Equipped WARNING To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLIS as areplacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and E124788 looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist 196 Driving Aids BLIS aids you in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone A The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet 3 meters beyond the bumper The system alerts you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone while driving Cross traffic alert warns you of vehicles approaching from the sides when the transmission is in R Reverse Note B S is
375. n used for the alert and alert aid modes This setting does not impact the aid mode Low Medium High System Display E151660 When the system is turned on an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will be displayed in the left hand instrument cluster display If the aid mode is selected when the system is turned on a separate white icon will also appear in the instrument cluster When the system is turned off the lane marking graphics will not be displayed Note The overhead vehicle graphic may still be displayed if adaptive cruise control is enabled While the system is on the color of the lane markings will change to indicate the system status Gray Indicates that the system is temporarily unable to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side s This may be because the vehicle is under the activation speed the turn indicator is active the vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver Driving Aids the road has no or poor lane markings Yellow Indicates that the system is in the camera field of view providing or has just provided a lane the camera is obscured or unable to keeping aid intervention detect the lane markings due to Red Indicates that the system is providing environmental conditions e g or has just provided a lane keeping alert significant sun angles or shadows warning snow heavy rain fog traffic conditions e g following a large Leste a Se o suppressed vehic
376. nd throughout feature activation and use The 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident A Bluetooth enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and connected to SYNC Aconnected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident Aconnected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage battery power and signal strength The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U S Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut off which would activate 911 Assist however if 911 Assist is triggered SYNC tries to contact emergency services If a connected phone is damaged or loses connection to SYNC SYNC searches for and tries to connect to any available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911 Before making the call SYNC provides a short window of time about 10 seconds to cancel the call Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial 911 SYNC says the following or a similar message SYNC will attempt to call 911 to cancel the call press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel If the callis not cancelled and a successful call is made a pre recorded message is played for the 911 operator then the occupant s in the vehicle is able
377. ne plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port Bluetooth Audio Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle s speakers from your connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To access press the lower left D corner on the touchscreen then select the BT tab MyFord Touch if equipped Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands If you are listening to a Bluetooth us audio device press the voice Note f your Bluetooth device supports button on the steering wheel streaming metadata all the commands controls When prompted say any of the below are available If your device does not commands in the following chart only Next song Pause Play and Previous song are available If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device press the voice button and after the tone say Bluetooth Audio then any of the commands in the following chart BLUETOOTH AUDIO Browse album lt name gt Browse composer Play genre lt name gt lt name gt Browse all albums Browse folder lt name gt Play playlist lt name gt Browse all artists Browse genre lt name gt Play podcast episode lt name gt Browse all audiobooks Browse playlist lt name gt Play similar music Browse all authors Browse podcast lt name gt Play song lt name gt Browse all composers Next Previous Browse all folders Pause Repeat all Browse al
378. ne Oil Check page 243 Note Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately Fasten Safety Belt It will illuminate and a chime will Mh sound to remind you to fasten 7 your safety belt See Safety Belt Minder page 30 Front Airbag e If it fails to illuminate when you Ww start your vehicle continues to flash or remains on it indicates a malfunction Have the system checked by your authorized dealer Front Fog Lamps it Equipped It will illuminate when you switch D the front fog lamps on Instrument Cluster Heads Up Display it equipped Ared beam of lights will illuminate on the windshield in certain instances when using adaptive cruise control and or the collision warning system It will also illuminate momentarily when you start your vehicle to make sure the display works High Beam It will illuminate when you switch the high beam headlamps on It Es will flash when you use the headlamp flasher Lane Keeping Aid if equipped Low Fuel Level possible Illuminates when the lane keeping system is activated It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or the fuel tank is nearly empty Refuel as soon as Low Tire Pressure Warning 1 It will illuminate when your tire H pressure is low If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving check your tire pressure as soon as possib
379. ne check the following Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off Make sure the parking brake is on Starting and Stopping the Engine Move the transmission selector lever to position P Turn the ignition key to position IL Note Do not touch the accelerator pedal 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N Start the engine The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts Note f you cannot start the engine on the first try wait for a short period of time and try again If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below 13 F 25 C press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again If you cannot start the engine after three attempts wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure 1 Fully press the brake pedal 3 2 Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there 3 Move the transmission selector lever to position P 4 Start the engine Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects A 146 Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and
380. ne connects Note Every phone operates differently While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones some may have trouble using this feature SYNC If a crash deploys an airbag or activates the fuel pump shut off your SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone For more information about 911 Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca See Supplementary Restraints System page 34 Important information regarding airbag deployment is in this chapter See Roadside Emergencies page 225 Important information regarding the fuel pump shut off is in this chapter Setting 911 Assist On 1 Press the phone button to enter the Phone menu 2 Scroll until 911 Assist is selected 3 Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu 4 Scroll to choose between the On and Off selections 5 Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display Set On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation Off selections include Off with reminder and Off without reminder Off with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection at vehicle start Off without reminder provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection To make sure that 911 Assist works properly SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident a
381. next song 2 Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the current track 3 Press play or pause to play or pause the audio 4 Press Replay again to return to live audio if you have been using the replay feature to replay audio Scan Hear a brief sampling of channels Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP if equipped Occupancy Mode if equipped and Speed Compensated Volume 363 MyFord Touch if equipped When You Select You Can Set Category for Seek Scan allows you to select the desired category Rock Country etc and then use Seek or Scan to initiate a search for those channels Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock channels change or reset your PIN or unlock all channels To use this feature you need your initial PIN which is 1234 Artist Title Team Alerts allows you to select Artists Titles and Teams that you would like the system to alert you to when they are playing on other channels Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn off alerts You can also set all alerts to onor off When an alert appears on the screen you can choose to Tune to the channel to Cancel the alert or to Disable Alerts If you are listening to a sporting event you can save your favorite teams so that the system can alert you when they are playing on a satellite radio channel Note SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all ch
382. nflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from acold start situation If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning light for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure TIRE CARE Important information for 235 40R19 low profile tires and wheels f your vehicle is equipped with 235 40R19 tires they are low profile tires These tires and wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport appearance With low profile tires you may notice an increase in road noise and faster tire wear depending on road conditions and driving styles Due to their design low profile tires and wheels are more prone to road damage from potholes rough or unpaved roads car wash rails and curb contact than standard tires and wheels Note Your vehicle s
383. ng temperature Elevation is below approximately 10000 feet 3048 m Ambient temperature is moderate 40 F 95 F 4 C 35 C Note The system allows multiple successive Auto StopStart events but it may not operate in conditions of heavy traffic or in extended low speed operation Note The green Auto StartStop A indicator light on the instrument cluster will illuminate to indicate when the automatic engine stop occurs Note lf the instrument cluster is Ma equipped with a grey Auto StartStop indicator light it is illuminated when automatic engine stop is not available due to one of the above noted conditions Automatic Engine Restart Any of the following conditions will result in an automatic restart of the engine Your foot is removed from the brake pedal You press the accelerator pedal Unique Driving Characteristics You press the accelerator and the Note f the Shift to P Restart Engine brake pedal at the same time message appears and the amber Auto The transmission selector lever is StartStop indicator light is flashing moved from position D automatic restart is not available The sah at i vehicle must be restarted manually See Your vehicle is moving Information Displays page 83 The interior compartment does not meet customer comfort when air conditioning or heat is on Fogging of the windows could occur and the air conditioning is on The battery is not within optimal operating
384. ng Cruise Control Off Switching Cruise Control On ing MyKey With Remote Start U Using Snow Chains Using Stability CONtKrOL ce eeeeseeseseseeee 173 Advance Trac isinisi insitata siia 173 Using SYNC With Your Media Playe r ae ae R Accessing Your Play Menu Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the Media Menu Features Media Voice Commands System Settings What s Playing Using SYNC With Your Phone Accessing Features through the Phone Accessing Your Phone Settings Making Calls Pairing a Phone for the First Time Pairing Subsequent Phones Phone Options during an Active Call Phone Voice Commands Receiving Calls System Settings Text Messaging 445 Using Traction Control System Indicator Lights and Messages Using Voice Recognition Helpful Hints Initiating a Voice Session System Interaction and Feedback Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Program Canada OMnly c cccseseecesees 221 V Vehicle Care General Information Vehicle Certification Label Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Storage Battery Ventilation See Climate Control 118 VIN See Vehicle Identification Number 288 VOICE COMMON sicciasssscsissszincestssaszicezetezeessncazazed 63 Index W Warning Lamps and Indicatorg 79 Adaptive Cruise Control Anti Lock
385. ngine service is required Contact your authorized dealer High Engine Temper ature Stop Safely Displays when the engine temperature is too high Stop the vehicle in a safe place and allow to engine to cool If the problem persists contact your authorized dealer See Engine Coolant Check page 244 97 Information Displays Fuel Message Action Fuel Level Low Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition Check Fuel Fill Inlet Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Hill Start Assist Message Action Hill Start Assist Not Available Displays when hill start assist is not available Contact your authorized dealer See Hill Start Assist page 161 Keys and Intelligent Access Message Action Press Brake to START Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle No Key Detected Displayed if the key is not detected by the system See Keyless Starting page 143 Restart Now or Key is Needed Run Power Active Displayed when the start stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and a Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle Starting System Fault Displayed when the vehicle is in the run ignition state Press Brake and Clutch to Start This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle s starting system See your authorized dealer
386. nothing obstructing its movement and the transmission in R Reverse the vehicle steers itself as instructions to safely move the vehicle back and forward in the space are displayed in the touch screen While reversing the touch screen displays a message instructing you to check your surroundings for safety reasons and to back up slowly accompanied by a corresponding graphic cog When automatic steering is finished the touch screen displays a message indicating that the active park assist process is done The driver is responsible for checking the parking job and making any necessary corrections 177 Parking Aids Deactivating the Park Assist Feature The system can be deactivated manually by pressing the active park assist button grabbing the steering wheel driving above approximately 20 mph 35 km h for 30 seconds during an active park search driving above 6 mph 10 km h during automatic steering turning off the traction control system Troubleshooting the System Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivate the system such as Traction control has activated ona slippery or loose surface There is an anti lock brake system activation or failure Something touches the steering wheel If a problem occurs with the system a warning message is displayed followed by a chime Occasional system messages may occur in normal operation For recurring or frequent system faults contact
387. ns to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time Volume Setting Do not raise the volume excessively Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident Use of Speech Recognition Functions Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors Navigation Features Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully Distraction Hazard Any navigation features may require manual non verbal setup Attempting to perform such set up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious consequences Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations Let Your Judgment Prevail Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment Any route su
388. nt Portions of the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDR M software to access WMDRM protected content If the WMDR M software fails to protect the content content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content This action does not affect unprotected content When your DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses Content owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE to access their content If you decline an upgrade you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade Appendices Consent to Use of Data You agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and services suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may disclose this information to others but not in a form that personally identifies yo
389. nt of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat inthe front seat move the seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending onthe child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling Place your vehicle seat back in the upright position Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode See Step 5 This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap and shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat E142528 1 Pos
390. nual Climate Control Vehicle With Automatic Climate Control Select the instrument panel and footwell air vents positions through the air distri bution control Press the defrost button Press the A C button Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting Direct the instrument panel side air vents toward the side windows Close the instrument panel center vents HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS iF EQUIPPED Heated Rear Window Note The ignition must be switched on to use this feature 126 Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog Press the button again within 10 minutes to switch it off It switches off automatically after 10 minutes or when you switch the ignition off Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty Climate Control Heated Exterior Mirror if Equipped Note Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning pro
391. o the vehicle MYKEY MILES Tracks mileage when a restricted key is used If mileage does not accumulate as expected then the key is not being used by the intended user The only way to reset this to zero is by clearing MyKeys If the mileage is lower than the last time you checked then the key system has been recently reset MYKEY S Indicates how many restricted keys are programmed to the vehicle Can also be used to detect deletion of a restricted key ADMIN KEY S Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the vehicle Can also be used to detect if an additional key has been programmed to the vehicle USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS MyKey is NOT compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to installa remote start system please see your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system MyKey MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING Condition Potential Causes cannot program a key I cannot program the optional settings The key in the ignition does not have admin privileges The key in the ignition is the only admin key there always has to be at least one admin key The intelligent access key is not in the backup slot vehicles with push button start SecuriLock passive anti theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode The key in the ignition does not have admin privileges cannot program the optional settings No k
392. o should never exceed 492 kg or 1085 Ibs Le poids total des occupants et du chargement na doit jamais d pesser kg ou lb TIRE COURESSION DES SEE OWNERS PNEU PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI INFORMATION REAR gt VOIR LE MANUEL P235 70R16_ 240 KPA 35 PSI DE LUSAGER SPARE POUR PLUS DE ain T145 90R17 415 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS x amp x x fo S x amp R fo 3 E142517 203 Load Carrying CARGO E143817 Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer E143818 Load Carrying GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight car
393. oadside Emergencies Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNING Do not attach the cables to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points Stay clear of moving parts Note n the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the booster vehicle 1 u N E wp 3 agi DAA A E Na E142664 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Jump Starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and rev the engine moderately 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the Jumper Cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected Roadside Emergencies eer i n Ba g _ E142665 1 Remove the jumper ca
394. ocess at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP Customer Assistance The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings Inthe CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE
395. ock the normal detection zone of the system may create false beeps Note Keep the sensors located on the bumper or fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt If the sensors are covered the system s accuracy can be affected Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects Note f your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms 174 Note f your vehicle is equipped with MyKey itis possible to prevent turning the sensing system off See MyKey page 49 The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of the bumper area The system turns on automatically whenever the ignition is switched on When receiving a detection warning the radio volume is reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio volume returns to the previous level The system can be switched off through the information display menu or from the pop up message that appears once the transmission is shifted into R See General Information page 83 If a fault is present in the system a warning message appears in the information display and does not allow the driver to switch the faulted system on See Information Messages page 91 Rear Sensing System The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R As the vehicle moves closer to the o
396. ols Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function properly when the system is activated because the brakes are electronically controlled Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury Do not use tires sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of the system Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury E145632 Cruise Control A message will display if the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed The sensor is located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille A vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the system will not function when the radar signals are obstructed The following table ists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed Cause Action The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruc tion The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display Wait a short time It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals Do not use the system in these condition because it may not detect warn or respond to potential collisions Swirling water or snow orice on the su
397. ommands Baseball College basketball College football Golf MLS My teams NBA NFL NHL 387 MyFord Touch if equipped Sports related Commands WN BA n Help If you want to hear headlines schedules or scores from a particular sport or your favorite team s say the sport or team then headlines schedules or scores Additional Sports related Voice Commands Baseball headlines MLS headlines NBA scores Baseball schedule MLS schedule NFL headlines Baseball scores MLS scores NFL schedule College basketball Motor sports headlines NFL scores schedule College basketball scores Motor sports order NHL headlines College football headlines Motor sports schedule NHL schedule College football schedule My team headlines NHL scores College football scores My teams schedule WNBA headlines Golf headlines My teams scores WNBA schedule Golf leaderboard NBA headlines WNBA scores Golf schedule NBA schedule Help Note The system alerts you to any Alerts messages by turning the information icon yellow When the messages are read or Press the Information button then select deleted the icon returns to white Alerts You can select a message and choose to Calendar View the complete message Press the Information button then select
398. on Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located onthe B Pillar or the edge Wheels and Tires of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile Note f you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it isnormal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note f you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to
399. on s Try deleting your device from SYNC deleting SYNC from your device and trying again Check the security and auto accept prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone Update your device s firm ware Turn off the Auto phone book download setting Text messaging is not working on SYNC This is a phone dependent feature Possible phone malfunc tion Go to the website to review your phone s compatibility Try turning off the device resetting the device or removing the device s then trying again USB Media Issues Possible Cause s Possible Solution s I m having trouble connecting my device Possible device malfunction 330 Try turning off the device resetting the device removing the device s battery then trying again Make sure you are using the manufacturer s cable Make sure the USB cable is properly inserted into the device and the vehicle s USB port SYNC USB Media Issues Possible Cause s Possible Solution s Make sure that the device does not have an auto install program or active security settings SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the car This is a device limitation Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures Bluetooth audio does not stream This is a phone dependent feature
400. on your vehicle Mobile Apps Interact with SYNC capable mobile applications on your smartphone System Settings Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings add connect set as primary on off delete as well as Advanced menu listings prompts languages defaults master reset install application and system information Exit Phone Menu Exit the phone menu by pressing OK This is a phone dependent feature This is a phone dependent and speed dependent feature If equipped U S only If equipped U S and Canada only Text Messaging Note This is a phone dependent feature SYNC allows you to receive send download and delete text messages The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road Receiving a Text Message Note This is a phone dependent feature Your phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages Note Forwarding a text message is a speed dependent feature and can only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph 5 km h or less Note Only one recipient is allowed per text message 308 SYNC When anew message arrives an audible tone sounds and the display indicates you have anew message You have these options Press the voice button wait for the prompt and say Read message to have SYNC read the message to you Press OK to receive and op
401. onnect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds 680 kilograms when loaded Trailer Lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up the lamps Towing Before Towing a Trailer Practice turning stopping and backing up to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination before starting on a trip When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles When Towing a Trailer Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 kilometers Do not make full throttle starts Check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles 80 kilometers Wh
402. operly To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly Use only the specified fuel listed Avoid running out of fuel Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed inscheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability Illumination of the service engine soon indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately 155 Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted
403. or Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMSis malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety Practices WARNINGS If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds Wheels and Tires WARNINGS Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety Observe posted speed limits Avoid fast starts stops and turns Avoid potholes and objects on the road Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged def
404. or equivalent Press the button to release the key before beginning the procedure E151798 1 Insert a screwdriver in the position shown and gently push the clip 2 Press the clip down to release the battery cover E15179 3 Carefully remove the cover Keys and Remote Controls E151796 Note Do not touch the battery contacts or 1 Slide the release on the back of the the printed circuit board with the remote control and pivot the cover off screwdriver 4 Insert a screwdriver as shown to release the battery E153890 2 Insert a coin into the slot and twist to separate the housing amp i E151801 5 Remove the battery 6 Install a new battery with the facing Up 7 Replace the battery cover Intelligent Access Transmitter The remote control uses two coin type three volt lithium batteries CR2025 or equivalent E153891 3 Remove the batteries 4 Install new batteries with the facing each other Note Make sure to replace the label between the two batteries 46 Keys and Remote Controls 5 Reinstall the housing and cover Car Finder Press the button twice within A three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn signals will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a Panic Alarm Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off Press the b
405. or controlling your vehicle supervising the system and intervening if required If the engine is revved excessively or if a malfunction is detected the system will be deactivated The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake When the system is active your vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal This allows you time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope This is an advantage when pulling away ona slope for example from a car park ramp traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space The system will activate automatically on any slope which can result in significant vehicle rollback Transmission Using Hill Start Assist 1 Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill Keep the brake pedal pressed 2 Ifthe sensors detect that your vehicle is ona slope the system will be activated automatically 3 When you remove your foot from the brake pedal your vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three seconds This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving off 4 Drive off in the normal manner The brakes will
406. or not at all if the items are optional Trip land 2 Trip Odometer Trip Timer Fuel Used Average Fuel Information Displays Trip land 2 All Values Outside Temperature Resetting the Trip Computer Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip distance time and fuel information Trip Odometer Registers the distance of individual journeys Trip Timer timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle is restarted Fuel Used shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip Average Fuel shows the average fuel economy for a given trip All Values Shows all trip values Outside Temperature Shows the outside air temperature Fuel Economy Distance to E Inst Fuel Econ Long Term Average Fuel Fuel History All Values Information Auto Stop Start Available Auto Start Stop messaging will provide details about what is happening with your system See Informa tion Messages page 91 Intelligent AWD MyKey System Check All active warnings will display first if applicable The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status Use the up down arrow buttons to scroll through the list 84 Information Displays Settings Driver Assist Traction Ctrl On or Off Blind Spot On default on key
407. order to maintain their shine Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers 259 Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Industrial strength heavy duty cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clear coat finish over time Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time 30 days or more read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components General Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place Protect from sunlight if possible If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Vehicle Care Body Wash vehicl
408. orm scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury A 316 Note Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report but you must register to use this feature Note This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone Before running a report review the Vehicle Health Report privacy notice Note n order to allow a break in period for your vehicle you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www SYNCMyRide com After registering you can request a Vehicle Health Report inside your vehicle Return to your account at www SYNCMyRide com to view your report You can also choose for SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage intervals Cellular phone airtime Usage may apply when reporting The system allows you to check your vehicle s overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card The vehicle health report contains valuable information such as Vehicle diagnostic information Scheduled maintenance Open Recalls and Field Service Actions Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer To run a report after the
409. ory preset there is a mute before the digital audio is played as the system must once again acquire the digital signal As with any saved radio station you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station s reception area 359 MyFord Touch if Equipped HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential Reception Issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area the station may mute due to weak signal strength If you are listening to HD1 the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again However if you are listening to any of the possible HD2 HD7 multicast channels the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again Station blending When a station is first received aside from HD2 HD7 multicast stations the system first plays the station in the analog version and then if the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station it shifts to the digital version Depending on the station quality you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital This shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog is known as blending In order to provide the best possible experience a contact form has been developed to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcast
410. ou can access features such as SYNC Services SIRIUS Travel Link Alerts Calendar SYNC Applications If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation press the Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation press the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab SYNC Services If Equipped U S Only Note SYNC Services requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services Standard phone and message rates may apply Subscription may be required You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to and use SYNC Services See Phone page 376 Note This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your cellular phone Make sure your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services MyFord Touch i Equipped Note The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result inan unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation
411. ouch i equipped When You Select You Can Manage Phonebook Access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook Display call history Display call history If compatible Phone Voice Commands e Press the voice button on the us steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands PHONE Bluetooth off Hold call off Bluetooth on Hold on Call Join calls Call lt name gt Listen to text message lt gt Call lt name gt at home Listen to text messages Call lt name gt at work Messages Call lt name gt on cell Mute call Call lt name gt on other Pair phone Call voicemail Privacy on Dial Reply to text messages Do not disturb off Turn ringer off Do not disturb on Turn ringer on 381 MyFord Touch if equipped PHONE Forward text messages Unmute call Go to hands free Help These commands are only available during an active call If you say Messages see the following Messages chart for additional commands MESSAGES Call Forward text messages Listen to text message lt gt Listen to text messages Reply to text messages Help INFORMATION Under the Information menu y
412. ounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 3 66 m away from the wheel and tire assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting WARNINGS Always inflate steel carcass tires witha remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 3 66 m away from the wheel and tire assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Mot
413. our vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank Empty reserve is the amount of fuel remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty Do not rely on this fuel for driving The usable capacity of the fuel tank is the amount of fuel that can be put into the tank after the gauge indicates empty The advertised capacity is the total fuel tank size it is the combined usable capacity plus the empty reserve Filling the Tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank Turn the ignition off before fueling an inaccurate reading results if the engine is left running Use the same fill rate low medium high each time the tank is filled Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent Calculating Fuel Economy Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers of driving this is your engine s break in period a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles 3000 miles 3200 kilometers 4800 kilometers Also fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy 1 Fillthe fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added
414. ov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada Transport Canada Contact Information Website https Awwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx 1 800 333 0510 Phone Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold In The U S Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available 24 hours seven days a week for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner s Manual portfolio Roadside assistance will cover a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit battery jump start lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5 liters of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9 liters of diesel fuel to a
415. overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting Always handle discs by their edges only Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only wiping from the center of the disc toward the edge Do not clean ina circular motion Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time MP3 Track and Folder Structure Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks and folder structures work as follows There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from TOO to a maximum of T255 The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present Audio System MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from FOO folder TOO track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files If you are burning your own MP3
416. ow Phone book commands When you ask SYNC to access a phone book name number etc the requested information appears in the display to view Press the phone button and say Call to call the contact DIAL 411 four one one 911 nine one one etc 700 seven hundred 800 eight hundred 900 nine hundred Pound Slash Number lt 0 9 gt Asterisk Clear deletes all entered digits Delete deletes one digit Plus Star 304 SYNC Note 70 exit dial mode press and hold the phone button or press Menu to go to the Phone menu MENU Phone connections Phone settings message notification off Phone settings message notification on Phone settings set phone ringer Phone settings set ringer 1 Phone sett Phone sett ings set ringer 2 ings set ringer 3 Phone settings set ringer off B attery Phone name Signal Text message inbox the command Words in are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand Making Calls Press the voice icon and when prompted say 1 Say Call lt name gt or Dial then the desired number 2 Whenthe system confirms the number say Dial again to initiate the call To erase the last spoken digit say Delete or press the left arrow butto
417. ow or failing to pay attention to the road may result ina collision serious injury or death Adaptive cruise control is nota collision warning or avoidance system Adaptive cruise control will not detect stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph 10 km h Adaptive cruise control will not detect pedestrians or objects in the roadway Adaptive cruise control will not detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Do not use in poor visibility specifically fog rain soray or snow Note t is your responsibility to stay alert drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times The system is designed to automatically adjust your speed to maintain a proper distance between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane The driver can select from one of four GAP settings the controls are located on the steering wheel The system is designed to automatically adjust your speed to maintain a proper distance between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane The driver can select from one of four GAP settings the controls are located on the steering wheel E144501 The controls for using your cruise control are located on the steering wheel Switching the System On Press and release ON The information display will show the gre
418. ows to fog up Note A small amount of air may be felt from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting Note 70 reduce humidity build up inside your vehicle do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on Note Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats Note Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield 124 Manual Climate Control Note 70 reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position Automatic Climate Control Note Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary The system automatically make adjustments to heat or cool the cabin to your temperature set point as quickly as possible For the system to function efficiently the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open Note At low ambient temperatures with AUTO selected the air flow is directed to the windshield and side window vents and fan speed may be reduced until the engine remains warms up Climate Control Heating the Interior Quickly Vehicle With Manual Climate Control Vehicle With Automatic Climate Control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting Press the AUTO button 2 Adjust the temperature control to the highe
419. perform the additional maintenance For specific recommendations see your dealership service advisor or technician 429 Scheduled Maintenance Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the information display Example 1 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28751 miles 46270 kilometers perform the 30000 mile 48000 kilometer uid automatic transmission f replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30000 miles 48000 kilometers perform the engine air filter replacement i e Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25000 miles 40000 kilometers Towing a Trailer or Using a Car top Carrier As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched uled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently service as required Inspect and lubricate U joints Every 30000 miles 48000 km Change automatic transmission fluid Extensive Idling or Low speed Driving for Long Distances as in Heavy Commercial Use i e Delivery Taxi Patrol Car or Livery As required Inspect frequently service as required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched uled Maintenance ch
420. phone button on your steering wheel controls Pr Reject the call by pressing t Reject on the touchscreen or by pressing and holding this phone button on your steering wheel controls Ignore the call by doing nothing SYNC logs it as a missed call Phone Menu Options Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the following options When You Select You Can Phone Access the on screen numerical pad to enter a number and place a call MyFord Touch if equipped When You Select Quick Dial You Can During an active call you can also choose to mute the call put it on hold activate privacy returns the call to your cellular phone join two calls or end the call Select and call contacts stored in your phonebook contacts and call history folder Phonebook Access and call any contacts in your previously down loaded phonebook The system places the entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of the screen To turn on contact picture settings if your device supports this feature press Phone Settings Manage Phonebook Download Photos from Phonebook then select On Certain smartphones may support transferring street addresses when listed with phonebook contact informa tion If this feature is supported you can select and use these addresses as destinations and also save them as favorites History Access any previously dialed receive
421. place the carpeted wheel cover The full size road wheel can be stowed in the spare tire compartment 1 Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an angle to access the spare tire compartment 2 Place the wheel in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down Use the mini spare bolt to secure the wheel through one of the lug holes 3 Place the jack tools and foam block back into the spare tire compartment E146026 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Bolt size lb ft Nm M12 x1 5 100 135 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc 284 Wheels and Tires E145950 A
422. placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors changes inroads traffic conditions or driving conditions Note When you connect the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request Further to provide the services you request and for continuous improvement the service may collect and record call details and voice communications For more information see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www SYNCMyRide com If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions do not activate or use the service SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data to give you personalized traffic reports precise turn by turn directions business search news sports weather and more For a complete list of services or to learn more please visit www SYNCMyRide com Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands 1 Press the voice button 318 2 When prompted say Services This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone Once you
423. power assist steering 20 10A Run start lighting 21 15A Run start transmission control Transmis sion oil pump start stop 22 10A A C clutch solenoid 23 15A Blind spot information system Rear view camera Adaptive cruise control Heads up display 24 Not used 25 104 Anti lock brake system 231 Fuses Fuse relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 26 10A2 Powertrain control module 27 10A Not used spare 28 Not used 29 Not used 30 Not used 31 Not used 32 Electronic fan 1 relay 33 A C clutch relay 34 Not used 35 Not used 36 Not used 37 Not used 38 Electronic fan 2 relay 39 Electronic fan 3 relay 40 Fuel pump relay 4 Horn relay 42 Not used 43 Not used 44 Not used 45 Not used 46 10A2 Alternator 47 10A2 Brake on off switch 48 20A Horn 49 5A Mass air flow monitor 50 Not used 51 Not used 232 Fuse relay number Protected components Not used Power seats Not used Not used Micro fuse Dual micro fuse M type fuse 1 Release the two latches located on Power Distribution Box Bottom both sides of the fuse box There are fuses located on the bottom of 2 Raise the inboard side of the fuse box the fuse box To access the bottom of the from the cradle fuse box do the following 3 Move the fuse box toward the cente
424. pper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors They are designed to increase your visibility along the side of your vehicle Check the main mirror first before a lane change then check the blind spot mirror If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance signal that you intend to change lanes Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes 74 E138665 The image of the approaching vehicle is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror when it is at a distance The image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror as the vehicle approaches A The image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle approaches B The vehicle will transition to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror C Blind Spot Monitor if Equipped See Blind Spot Monitor page 196 INTERIOR MIRROR WARNING Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving Windows and Mirrors Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference Some mirrors also have a second pivot point This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce
425. pple nation USB RCA e available for When the cable is connected to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port MyFord Touch it equipped Note Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output The AU only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control Note Do not set the portable media player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes distortion and reduces sound quality Note f the audio sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable media player volume down If the problems persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable media player Note The portable media player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control e g play or pause over the attached portable media player PHONE Hands free calling is one of the main features of SYNC Once your phone is paired you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands While the system supports a variety of features many are dependent on your cellular phone s functionality At aminimum most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions Answering an incoming call Ending a call Using privacy mode Dialing a number Redialing Call waiting notification Caller ID
426. pressing MENU then AUX See SYNC page 298 MENU allows you to access different audio system features See Menu Structure later in this chapter MEDIA allows you to access the media features of the SYNC system by pressing MENU then AUX See SYNC page 298 Clock Press to set the time Use the H and M buttons outside the adjust the hours and minutes Press OK to finish The clock can also be set by pressing MENU then scrolling to the clock settings menu RADIO allows you to access different radio features by pressing RADIO then MENU See Menu Structure later in this chapter SIRIUS Press to access different satellite radio features by pressing SIRIUS then MENU See Menu Structure later in this chapter 108 Audio System AUDIO UNIT VEHICLES WITH PREMIUM AM FM CD WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving Note Most of the audio features are controlled through the MyFord Touch system See MyFord Touch page 335
427. r of the engine compartment 4 Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box to access the bottom side E145983 233 E144949 The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 56 30A Fuel pump feed 57 Not used 30a 500W Electronic fan 3 p80 304 500W Electronic fan 1 61 Not used 62 504 Body control module 1 204 500W Electronic fan 2 64 Not used 234 Information Provided by Ga PS4CER Fuses Fuse relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components 65 20A Front heated seat 66 Not used 67 50A2 Body control module 2 68 4OA Heated rear window 69 30A Anti lock brake system valves 70 30A Passenger seat 7 Not used 72 30A Moonroof 73 20A Not used spare 74 30A Driver seat module 75 Not used 76 20A Transmission oil pump 2 stop start 77 30A Not used spare 78 Not used 79 4OA Blower motor 80 30A Not used spare 81 4OA Inverter 82 604 Anti lock brake system pump 83 25A Wiper motor 1 84 30A Starter solenoid 85 30A Not used spare M type fuse 7J type fuse 235 Fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel E145984 The fuses are coded as follows The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the steering column Note t may be easier to access the fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece
428. r handling Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service Note f your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time Maintenance To ensure proper operation of the battery management system BMS any electrical devices that are added to the vehicle should not have their ground connection made directly at the negative battery post A connection at the negative battery post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation Note Flectrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle When a battery replacement is required t
429. r Owner s Manual Special Instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNINGS Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury See Supplementary Restraints System page 34 1 1 Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag 12 MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However you must not compromise your own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile communication equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices text messaging devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in T loss of vehicle control accident and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicabl
430. r businesses by name or by category residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription For more information on Operator Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com support Follow the voice prompts to select your destination Once your destination is selected your current vehicle location is uploaded and a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent back to your vehicle After the route download is complete the phone call is automatically ended You then receive audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destination 3 While on an active route you can select or say Route summary or Route status to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route Status ETA You can also turn voice guidance on or off cancel the route or update the route If you miss a turn SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated Just say Yes when prompted and a new route is delivered to your vehicle Disconnecting from SYNC Services 1 2 Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel Say Goodbye from the SYNC Services main menu Personalizing Push to interrupt SYNC Services Quick Tips You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information You can save address points such as work or home You can also save favorite infor
431. r e 190 COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM 19 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION 190 USING DRIVER ALERT 190 Driver and Passenger Airbags 35 Children And AirDags c ccsceeseseeeseeseeeseeees 36 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating AdjUSMEM T dreisio 35 Driving AidS ccccscsestesestesestessestesessesesseseeeees 190 Driving HINTS eseseeeeeseseseeteeseseseseeeeeee 216 Index Driving Through Watel ccccsesesseseesees 216 DRL See Daytime Running LAMPS 68 E Economical Driving Electric Parking Brake Applying the electric parking brake Applying the electric parking brake when the Vehicle iS MOVING ccccceseeeseseeeseeseeee 69 Battery With No Charge c ccscsseseseeeeseeee 171 Parking on a hill vehicles with a manual TFANSMISSION c seesesseseseseesescesesseseesesteseseeseene 169 Releasing the electric parking brake Emission Control System On Board Diagnostics OBD II Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M Testing End User License Agreement oe SYNC End User License Agreement EULA Engine Block Heater Using the Engine Block Heater Engine Coolant Check 2 5L 1 6L EcoBoost 2 0L EcoBoost Adding Engine Coolant Checking the Engine Coolant Recycled Engine Coolant Severe Climates What you Should Know Abou Cooling Engine Immobilizer See Passive Anti Theft SystemM 59 Engine Oil Check 2 5L 1 6L EcoBoost 2 0
432. r mat or other covering Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control Driving Hints WARNINGS Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing loss of control of vehicle To install floor mats position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and press down to lock in To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure 218 Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may
433. r may cause increased shift efforts prematurely wear transmission components or damage the transmission Note Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill These actions will reduce the life of the clutch R13 5 4 E144954 Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully pressed To start the vehicle 1 Make sure the parking brake is fully set 2 Press the clutch pedal to the floor then put the gearshift lever in the neutral position 3 Start the engine 4 Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired gear 1 First or R Reverse 5 Release the parking brake then slowly release the clutch pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator 157 During each shift the clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the floor Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn t interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal Recommended Shift Speeds Note Do not downshift into 1 First when your vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph 24 km h This will damage the clutch Recommended upshifts for best fuel economy when accelerating Shift from 15 mph 24 km h 25 mph 40 km h 40 mph 64 km h 45 mph 72 km h 50 mph 80 km h Reverse Note Make sure that your vehicle
434. r similar music However if you place these tracks onto your playing device in Mass Storage Device Mode they are available in voice recogni tion Play menu browsing and Similar Music Unknowns are placed into any unpopulated metadata tag Return Exit the current menu Bluetooth Devices Menu Options Press AUX and then MENU to enter System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu the Media menu features 2 Scroll until System Settings appears a and select OK then press OK The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you N toadd connectand delete a deviceasturn 3 Scroll until Bluetooth Devices the Bluetooth feature on and off appears The Advanced menu allows you to access 4 PressOK and then scroll to select from and set prompts languages defaults and perform a master reset System Settings 326 SYNC When You Select You Can Add Bluetooth Device Allows you to pair additional devices to the system 1 Press OK to select and press OK again when Find SYNC appears in the display 2 Follow the directions in your phone s user guide to put your phone into discovery mode A six digit PIN appears in the display 3 When prompted on your phone s six digit display enter the PIN Connect Bluetooth Device Connect a previously paired Bluetooth enabled phone 1 Press OK to select and view a list of devices 2 Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press
435. r your music files This overrides any art from your device This feature defaults to Media Player Navigation Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Navigation then select from the following Navigation Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top Turn the Parking POI notification on and off Route Preferences Have the system display the shortest route fastest route or most ecological route Have the system avoid freeways Have the system avoid tollroads Have the system avoid ferries or car trains Have the system use HOV high occupancy vehicle lanes 35 MyFord Touch it Equipped Navigation Navigation Preferences Have the system use guidance prompts Have the system automatically fill in State Province information Traffic Preferences Have the system display areas where road work occurs Have the system display incident map icons on the map Have the system display areas where difficult driving conditions may occur Have the system display areas with snow and ice on the road may occur Have the system display any smog alerts Have the system display weather warnings Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announce ments Avoid Areas Enter specific areas
436. ransmission selector lever is in position Por N and your vehicle is not moving if the ignition is on A pre set memory position can also be recalled by pressing the unlock button on your remote control or intelligent access key if it is linked to a pre set position or by a driver door handle unlock with an intelligent access key present Linking a Pre Set Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key Your vehicle can save the pre set memory positions for up to three remote controls or intelligent access IA keys 1 With the ignition on move the memory positions to the desired positions 2 Press and hold the desired pre set button for about five seconds A chime will sound after about two seconds Continue holding until a second chime is heard 3 Within three seconds press the lock button on the remote control you are linking A single chime will sound To unlink a remote control follow the same procedure except in step 3 press the unlock button on the remote control Note 7o stop seat movement during a recall press any driver seat adjustment control any of the memory buttons or any mirror control switch Seat movement will also stop if you move your vehicle Note f more than one linked remote control or IA key is in range the memory function will move to the settings of the first key stored Easy Entry and Exit Function If the easy entry and exit feature is enabled this featu
437. rapidly when the programming is successful 138 Note The Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will need to be pressed again If the Genie transmitter indicator light displays green and red release the button until the indicator light turns off before pressing the button again Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode To do this 1 Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The indicator light will change from red to red and green Press the same button twice to confirm the change If done correctly the indicator light will turn green Programming Home ink to the Genie Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor Note You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor E142662 1 Press and hold the program button on the garage door opener motor until both blue indicator lights turn on Release the program button Only the smaller round indicator light should be on Universal Garage Door Opener 3 Press and release the program button The larger purple indicator light will flash Note The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds 4 Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand held transmitter s previously programmed button Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit
438. re are multiple possible responses to your request 341 When using voice commands words and icons may also appear in the lower left status bar indicating the status of the voice session i e listening success failed paused or try again Howto Use Voice Commands with Your System uf What Can Say To access the available voice commands for the current session do one of the following During a voice session press the help icon inthe lower left status bar of the screen Say What can I say for an on screen listing of the possible voice commands associated with your current voice session Press the voice icon After the tone say Help for an audible list of possible voice commands Helpful Hints Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands After pressing the voice icon wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command Any command spoken before this does not register with the system Speak naturally without long pauses between words At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon Press the voice icon after the tone speak your command clearly MyFord Touch if equipped Basic commands Say If You Want To Phone Make calls USB Access the device connected to your
439. re automatically moves the driver seat position rearward up to five centimeters when the transmission selector lever is in position P and the key is removed or the keyless start ignition is turned off The driver seat will return to the previous position when the key is put in the ignition or the keyless start ignition is activated Seats The easy entry and exit feature can be turned on or off using the driver information display REAR SEATS To lower the seat back s from inside the vehicle do the following E144634 1 Pull the handle to release the seat back 2 Push the seat back forward Note Your vehicle may have split seat backs that must be folded individually HEATED SEATS iFEouipPeD WARNING People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the heated seat The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the heated seat to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Do not do the following Place he
440. re speed dependent and cannot be performed when the vehicle is traveling at speeds greater than 3 mph Skm h Make sure that you review your device s user guide before using it with SYNC Speed Restricted Features Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while the vehicle is in motion so they are restricted from being modified unless the vehicle is not moving Some examples of these are listed below Screens that are too crowded with information such as Point of Interest POI reviews and ratings SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores movie times ski conditions etc Any action that requires using a keyboard such as entering a navigation destination or editing information All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries e g phone contacts recent phone call entries Listed below are more specific features that can only be modified while the vehicle is not moving 337 MyFord Touch if equipped Restricted Features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook contacts from a USB List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent phone call entries System Functionality Editing the keypad code Enabling Valet Mode Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active Wi Fi and Wireless Videos Photos and Graphics Editing wireless settings Editing the list of wir
441. red in a crash greatly increases Child Safety Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Using Tether Straps Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap a ils which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view amp amp E142537 24 Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors Note f you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it K
442. ree seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key into the ignition Switch the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the engine and operate the remote entry system if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter If it was not programmed successfully wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8 If you are still unsuccessful take your vehicle to your authorized dealer 2 8 9 60 Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key Note A maximum for four intelligent access keys can be programmed to your vehicle You must have two previously programmedintelligent access keys inside the vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access keys readily accessible See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed keys are not available Make sure that the vehicle is off before beginning this procedure Make sure that all doors are closed before beginning and that they remain closed throughout the procedure Perform all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence Stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again if any steps are performed out of sequence Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin
443. ress the for more information on these selections When done making your selections press Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you want your report Door Keypad Code If Equipped To change the keypad code for your keyless entry keypad system 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Door Keypad Code 2 Enter your current factory code then when prompted enter your new code Rear View Camera If Equipped This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera MyFord Touch i Equipped Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Rear View Camera then select from the following settings Rear Camera Delay Visual Park Aid Alert Guidelines Enable Valet Mode Note f you are locked out and need to reset the PIN you can enter 3681 and the system unlocks Valet mode allows you to lock the system so that none of your information on the system can be accessed until it is unlocked with the correct PIN 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Enable Valet Mode 2 When prompted enter a four digit PIN After you press Continue the system is locked until the correct PIN is entered again Settings Access and adjust system settings voice features as well as phone navigation and wireless settings Some of these settings can also be accessed with regard to their specific modes i e phone and media System Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt System then select from t
444. ress the right arrow to enter a menu Press the left arrow to exit a menu mM Audio System Manual tune Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels Autostore Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM and FM frequency bands PTY Set category Select to have the system search by certain music categories rock pop country etc RBDS RDS Select to view additional broadcast data if available This feature defaults to off RBDS RDS must be on for you to set a category SIRIUS Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels Show ESN Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number ESN You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS to activate modify or track your account Channel guide Select to view available satellite radio channels Press OK to select Tune Channel Skip Channel or Lock Channel Once a channel is skipped or locked you can only access it by pressing Direct and entering the channel number Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN Set category Select to view channel categories pop rock news etc If you select a category seek and scan functions will only stop on channels in that category Alerts Select to enable disable an alert for a song artist or team The system alerts you when the selection is playing on ano
445. ressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 kilometers Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and Wheels and Tires describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall Information on P Type Tires E142543 P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed r
446. rface of the road may interfere with the radar signals Do not use the system in these condition because it may not detect warn or respond to potential collisions You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no roadside objects Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control Due to the nature of radar technology it is possible to get a blockage warning and not be blocked This can happen for example when driving in sparse rural or desert environments A false blocked condition will either self clear or clear after a key cycle Switching to Normal Cruise Control WARNING Normal cruise control will not brake due to slower vehicles Always be aware of which mode is selected and apply the brakes when necessary You can manually change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control through the information display The cruise control indicator light 8 will replace the adaptive cruise control indicator light if normal cruise control is selected The gap setting will not be displayed the system will not automatically respond to lead vehicles and automatic braking will not be activated The system will default to adaptive cruise control when the engine is started 189 Driving Aids DRIVER ALERT ir cEquippPep PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING The driver alert system is designed to aid you It is not intended to replace your attention and judgment
447. ric parking brake is set but has not be released Press Brake to Release Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not be Park Brake released and the vehicle is moving Park Brake Limited The electric park brake system has detected a condition that Function Service requires service See your authorized dealer Required Park Brake System Overheated Displays when the electric parking brake was not released causing it to overheat Release Park Brake Displays when the electric parking brake is set and the vehicle is started Park Brake Applied Displays when the electric parking brake is set Park Brake Released Displays when the electric parking brake is released 102 Information Displays Power Steering Message Action Steering Fault Service Now The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service See your authorized dealer Steering Loss Stop Safely The power steering system is not working Stop the vehicle a safe place Contact your authorized dealer Steering Assist Fault Service Required The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive entry or passive start system requires service Contact your authorized dealer Remote Start Message Action To Drive Turn Key to On Displays as a reminder to turn the key on to drive the vehicle after a remote star
448. riving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving Note n order to use SIRIUS Travel Link your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot Note A paid subscription is required to access and use these features Go to www siriusxm com travellink for more information Note Visit wwwsiriusxm com traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SIRIUS Travel Link Note Neither S RIUS nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the SIRIUS Travel Link services or its use in vehicles SIRIUS Travel Link if activated can help you locate the best gas prices find movie listings get current traffic alerts access the current weather map get accurate ski conditions and scores to current sports games Press the Information button select Sirius Travel Link then choose from any of the following services When You Select You Can
449. rns WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located onthe B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certificati
450. roduction Note Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic directions and Information privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an event data recorder special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada 10 Note ncluding to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped i
451. rrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software Such data may not always reflect reality due to among other things road closures construction weather new roads and other changing conditions You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software For example but without limitation you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well being or survival of you or others is dependent onthe accuracy of navigation as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications especially in more remote geographical areas TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE WHETHER STATUTORY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties so this limitation may not apply to you 5 Limitation of Liability TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGE
452. rrently playing More Info Displays information such as current track artist name album and genre Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP if equipped Occupancy Mode if equipped and Speed Compensated Volume Media Player Settings allows you to select more settings which can be found under Media Player See Settings page 347 Device Information displays software and firmware information about the currently connected media device Browse Update Media Index indexes the device each time it is connected to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all media on the device Browse the contents of the device It also allows you to search by genre artist album etc To view song information such as Title Artist File Folder Album and Genre touch the on screen album art You can also press What s Playing to hear how the system pronounces the current band and song This can be helpful when using voice commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request Playing Video from Your Device To access and play video from your device your vehicle s transmission must be in position P automatic transmission or neutral manual transmission with the ignition in accessory mode See Keyless Starting page 143 USB and SD Card Voice Commands If you are listening to a USB us device or an SD card press the voice
453. ruise Control if Equipped The speed control system BR indicator light changes color to indicate what mode the system isin See Using Cruise Control page 183 On white light Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is turned on Turns off when the speed control system is turned off Engaged green light Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged Anti Lock Braking System If it illuminates when you are driving this indicates a malfunction You will continue to have the normal braking system without ABS unless the brake system warning lamp is also illuminated Have the system checked by your authorized dealer Auto Start stop if Equipped It will illuminate to inform you A when the engine shuts down or in conjunction with a message Battery If it illuminates while driving it indicates a malfunction Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately Blind Spot Monitor if Equipped orr G It will illuminate when you switch as this feature off or in conjunction witha message See Blind Spot Monitor page 196 See Information Messages page 91 Brake System It will illuminate when you o engage the parking brake with the ignition on Instrument Cluster If it illuminates when you are driving check that the parking brake is not
454. s Ford Authorized Parts used with every covered repair Rental Car Reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford Extended Service Plan may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts Out of fuel and lock out assistance Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation Ford Extended Service Plan Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford Extended Service Plan Service Contract With a Ford Extend Service Plan you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly Maintaining Your Vehicle Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle ma
455. s 8 1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof 8 2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement TeleNav retains all right title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software including without limitation all related intellectual property rights No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to or shall be granted or conferred by implication statute inducement estoppel or otherwise and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement Appendices 8 3 By using the TeleNav Software you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications including notices agreements legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software collectively Notices electronically TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav s Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software 8 4 TeleNav s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party s right to require performance at any time thereafter nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of
456. s including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues 261 Wheels and Tires TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Each tire including the spare if H provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possib
457. s a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines CLEANING THE INTERIOR WARNINGS Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag ina collision A For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner Vehicle Care If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover In Canada use Motorcraftt Multi Purpose Cleaner If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
458. s enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been ina crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and longitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 91 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See SYNC page 298 Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches that you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendorsit uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See SYNC page 298 Introduction CALIFORNIA PROPOSITIO
459. s the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane the vehicle speed will adjust automatically to maintain a preset gap distance The distance setting is adjustable The lead vehicle graphic will be illuminated The vehicle will maintain a constant distance between the vehicle ahead until the vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed the vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view the vehicle speed falls below 12 mph 20 km h anew gap distance is set The vehicle brakes will be automatically applied to slow the vehicle to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front The maximum braking which is applied by the system is limited and can be overridden by applying the brakes If the system predicts that its maximum braking level will not be sufficient an audible warning will sound while the system continues to brake This is accompanied by a heads up display a red warning bar illuminating on the windshield You should take immediate action Setting the Gap Distance Note t is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions Cruise Control E144502 A Gap decrease B Gap increase The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you can be decreased or increased by pressing the gap control lo E82312 The selected gap will be displayed in the message center as shown by the bars in the graphic Fo
460. s these buttons to turn airflow from the windshield instrument panel and footwell vents Air can be distributed through any combination of these air vents At least one of these buttons remain on while the system is on Indicators for all of these buttons will turn off whenever the air distribution is controlled automatically Fan speed control Press to increase the volume of air circulated in your vehicle AUTO Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system automatically adjusts fan speed air distribution A C operation and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature Passenger temperature control Turn to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle Heated rear window Turns the heated rear window on and off See Heated Windows and Mirrors page 126 MAX Defrost Press to switch on Outside air is distributed through the windshield air vents air conditioning is automatically turned on the fan is automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position When MAX defrost is on recirculated air cannot be selected to prevent fogging The heated rear window is automatically switched on when MAX defrost is selected Power Press the button to turn the system on and off When the system is off outside air is prevented from ent
461. screen and open the hood E142465 4 On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the right hand portion of the beam pattern If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line the headlamp will need to be adjusted Maintenance 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Phillips 2 screwdriver turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 6 Close the hood and turn off the lamps Horizontal Aim Adjustment Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is not adjustable REMOVING A HEADLAMP See an authorized dealer CHANGING A BULB Lamp Assembly Condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be anatural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are Presence of thin mist no streaks dr
462. se the TeleNav Software TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time with or without notice to you You agree to visit http Awww telenav com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy 410 1 Safe and Lawful Use You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software a observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely b use your own personal judgment while driving If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver places you in an unsafe situation or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe do not follow such instructions c do not input destinations or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software unless your vehicle is stationary and parked d do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal unauthorized unintended unsafe hazardous or unlawful purposes or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement e arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device such as an airba
463. seat mounted side airbags and the side curtain airbags Based on the type of collision frontal impact or side impact the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following PHB The readiness light will not Ww illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on The readiness light will either flash or stay lit Aseries of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem the light or both are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of acollision The safety belt pretensioners and the front airbag supplemental restraint system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device Supplementary Restraints System The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or front airbags did not acti
464. seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move your vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNINGS Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles ina collision or sud
465. should now flash purple 5 Press and hold the previously programmed button on the visor for 2 seconds Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves Programming is now complete Clearing a HomeLink Device To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash The indicator light will begin flashing in10 to 20 seconds at which time both buttons should be released Programming has now been erased and the indicator light should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user s authority to operate the equipment 139 Auxiliary Power Points 12 Volt DC Power Point WARNING Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket if equipped Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty and can result in fire or serious injury Note f
466. sing Active Park Assist Adjusting the Headlamps Horizontal Aim AdjUStMent ccceeeees Vertical Aim AdjUStMeNt ccc Adjusting the Steering Wheel Airbag DISPOSAL ceescesestesesseesesteseeteseeeees Air Conditioning See Climate COntrol w ccccesseseeseeseseeaeeees 118 Alarm See Anti Theft Alarm All Wheel Drive 163 Anti Theft Alarm 61 Arming the Alarm woul Disarming the Alarm ae Appendices ses 404 Audible Warnings and Indicators 82 Headlamps On Warning Chime a82 Key in Ignition Warning Chime Keyless Warning Alert Parking Brake On Warning AGIO COMTO liissi 62 Seek Next or PrevViOUS ssssssssssssssssrreeeseeerrrresss 62 AU GIO SYStOM scrzcsesccsetecsesccsescesesscesesecsevecsesecs 106 General Information Audio unit Vehicles With AM FM CD SYNC Satellite RAGIO sesseseeesseeee Audio unit Vehic AM FM CD Audio unit Vehic AM FM CD Menu Structure AUtOLAMPS eccescsessesesteseeseens Automatic Climate Control Automatic High Beam Control Activating the SyStemM Manually overriding the system Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning SNOW aaa a 161 SelectShift Automatic Trans mlS SOR eneore iinis 159 Understanding the Positions of Your Automatic Transmission 158 Automatic Transmission Fluid GHECK E EEA A tilts 247 Autowipers 65 Auxil
467. specified on the certification label Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Note There may be electrical items such as fuses or relays that can affect trailer towing operation See Fuses page 229 Your vehicle s load capacity is designated by weight not by volume so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components periodically during and after any towing operation Load Placement To help minimize how trailer movement affects the vehicle when driving Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor Load the heaviest items so they are centered between the left and right side trailer tires Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected the trailer frame should be level or slightly angled down toward the vehicle when viewed from the side When driving with a trailer or payload a
468. ssesteseseseeeseees 146 Unique Driving Character istics Start SlO resis Rhee 148 Fuel and Refueling Safety PreCautiOns cccccscsseseeseseeees 150 Fuel QUALITY ceceeceseeseseeesesesesseseesssesseseeseenes 151 REPU SUIS nnnereereerieetinestitis 151 Running Out of Fuel 152 Fuel Consumption 154 Emission Control SYStOM ccccssesecsesees 154 Transmission Manual TrAnsmMiSSiON cccccsesseseeeseees Automatic Transmission o FLL Start ASSIS t aennansannisesnsnnneni All Wheel Drive Using All Wheel Drive c ccccceestesestesees 163 Brakes General INFOrMatiOn ccccceseseeeseeseseeees 168 Hints on Driving With Anti Lock BrA ke S ccccscssessesessessesessssesssseessseessseessseesseses 168 Electric Parking Brake ccccessscestesesesees 169 Traction Control Principle Of Operation 172 Using Traction CONtKOL cs eceseeeseeeeeeees 172 Stability Control Principle Of Operation cece 173 Using Stability CONtrOL scene 173 Parking Aids Parking AiC u c ceccssesscsesscsessesesssseseessesesssesesees 174 Active Park ASSISt cccssssesseeseesessesseeseesees 176 Rear View CAmMera ecscescesessesesieseseseseseseeees 179 Cruise Control Principle Of Operation ccccseceseseeseeesees 183 USING Cruise CONtKOL eects 183 Using Adaptive Cruise Control 184 Driving Aids Driver Al rt ccecsessessesessessessesesssesssssessessseseees 190 Lane Keeping SYSTOM
469. st and power brake assist which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Note Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK Note Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer If required fluid should be added by an authorized dealer The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick Have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval See Scheduled Maintenance page 420 Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level shoul
470. st setting not MAX defrost Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting 3 Select the footwell air vents using the air distribution buttons Recommended Settings for Heating Vehicle With Manual Climate Control Vehicle With Automatic Climate Control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting Adjust the AUTO button 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings not MAX defrost Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting 3 Select the footwell air vents and wind shield air vents position using the air distribution buttons Cooling the Interior Quickly Vehicle With Manual Climate Control Vehicle With Automatic Climate Control 1 Adjust the temperature control to the MAX A C position Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting 2 Drive with the windows open for 2 3 minutes 125 Climate Control Recommended Settings for Cooling Vehicle With Manual Climate Control Vehicle With Automatic Climate Control Adjust the fan speed to the middle speed setting Press the AUTO button Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting Select the instrument panel air vents using the air distribution buttons Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather Vehicle With Ma
471. system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily Unavailable Front Camera Low Visib ility Clean Screen The system has detected a condition the requires the wind shield to be cleaned to operate properly Front Camera Malfunc tion Service Required The system has malfunctioned Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Keep Hands on Steering Wheel Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel 99 Information Displays Maintenance Message Action LOW Engine Oil Pressure Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible turn off the engine Check the oil level If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Change Engine Oil Soon Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10 or less See Engine Oil Check page 243 Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 See Engine Oil Check page 243 Brake Fluid Level LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately See Brake Fluid Check page 247 Check Brake System Displays when the brake system needs servicing Stop the vehicle in a safe place Contact your authorized dealer Engine Coolant Overtem perature Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high
472. t 372 MyFord Touch i equipped BROWSE All authors Author lt name gt All composers Composer lt name gt All folders Folder lt name gt All genres Genre lt name gt All movies Playlist lt name gt All music videos Podcast lt name gt All playlists TV show lt name gt All podcasts Video lt name gt All songs Video playlist lt name gt All TV shows Video podcast lt name gt All video playlists Help These commands are only available in USB mode and are device dependent Supported MediaPlayers Formats and Metadata Information SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including iPod Zune plays from device players and most USB drives Supported audio formats include MP3 WMA WAV and AAC It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device by metadata tags Metadata tags are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files which provide information about the file If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as Unknown In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you MUST have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable available for purchase from Apple When the cable is connected to your iPod or iPho
473. t To Drive Press Brake and Start Button Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and the start button to drive the vehicle after a remote start Starting System Message Action Press Brake Start Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the Button brake Engine Start Pending Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle Please Wait Pending Start Cancelled Displays when the pending start has been cancelled 103 Information Displays Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Action LOW Tire Pressure Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure See Tire Pressure Monitoring System page 262 Tire Pressure Monitor Fault Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer See Tire Pressure Monitoring System page 262 Tire Pressure Sensor Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or Fault your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions see See Tire Pres sure Monitoring System page 262 If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Traction Control Message Action Traction Control Off Traction Control On Displays when the traction control system
474. t pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel M Maximum Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating Wheels and Tires position or Tire Label which is located onthe B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire E142544 LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires th
475. t cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you ina collision Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of features E143942 A Cupholder B Storage compartment with auxiliary power point auxiliary input jack USB port and media hub C Auxiliary power point OVERHEAD CONSOLE E75193 Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION If you disconnect the battery your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles 8 kilometers after you reconnect it This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period WARNINGS Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage Do not park idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system creating the risk of fire Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment st
476. t is used Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty Use prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification See Capacities and Specifications page 286 In case of emergency a large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained chemically cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush and refilled with prediluted engine coolant as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant Unscrew the cap slowly Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification See Capacities and Specifications page 286 Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant level to the proper
477. t patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 lb 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb 99 kg the calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 12 x100 1400 440 1200 240 lb No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb 104 kg If you remove 3 100 lb 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 9x 100 1400 440 900 60 lb Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x99 kg 9x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg Load Carrying The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle ina manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position 209 Towing TOWING A TRAILER WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR
478. tain artist you could then say Refine album and choose a specific album from the list to view If you then select Play the system only plays music from that specific album Press the voice icon and when prompted say Bluetooth audio then any of the following BLUETOOTH AUDIO Connections Pause Play Play next track Play previous track E 1 Press AUX and then MENU to enter Media Menu Features the Media menu The media menu allows you to selectyour 2 Scroll to cycle through media source how to play your music by artist genre shuffle repeat etc and also to add connect or delete devices 323 SYNC When You Select You Can Play Menu Select Source Play your music by artist album genre playlists tracks similar music or to simply play all You can also choose to Explore USB to view the supported digital music files on your playing device Select and play music from your USB port auxiliary input jack line in or stream music from your Bluetooth enabled phone Press OK to select then scroll to choose from USB Bluetooth Audio and Line In When you select USB and Autoplay is on you can access media files randomly as they are indexed If turned off indexed media is not available until the indexing process is complete SYNC is capable of indexing thou sands of average size media and notifies you if the maximum index
479. te listed below HD2 HD7 stations not found when Sean is pressed Pressing Scan disables HD2 HD7 channel search None This is normal beha vior http www ibiquity com automotive report_radio_station_experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and foreign patents HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology Content may be changed added or deleted at any time at the station owner s discretion Radio Voice Commands If you are listening to the radio press the voice button on the if Es steering wheel controls When prompted say any of the following commands If you are not listening to the radio press the voice button and after the tone say Radio then any of the following commands MyFord Touch it equipped RADIO lt 87 9 107 9 gt FM autoset preset lt gt lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD FMipreset lt gt lt 530 1710 gt FM 1 AM FM 1 preset lt gt AM lt 530 1710 gt FM 2 AM autoset FM 2 preset lt gt AM autoset preset lt gt HD lt gt AM preset lt gt Preset lt gt Browse Radio off FM Radio on FM lt 87 9 107 9 gt Set PTY FM lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt gt Tune
480. te the tail lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision 68 Lighting The system switches the low beam headlamps on at a reduced intensity in daylight conditions To switch the system on switch the ignition on and switch the lighting control to the off autolamp or parking lamp position AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL F EquippPep The system will automatically turn on your high beams if itis dark enough and no other traffic is present When it detects an approaching vehicle s headlights a preceding vehicle s tail lamps or street lighting the system will turn off the high beams before they distract other drivers The low beams remain on Note f it appears that automatic control of the high beams is not functioning properly check the windshield in front of the camera for blockage A clear view of the road is required for proper system operation Any windshield damage in the area of the camera field of view should be repaired Note f a blockage is detected e g bird dropping bug splatter snow or ice and no changes are observed the system will go into low beam mode until the blockage is cleared A message may also appear in the instrument cluster display noting the front camera is blocked Note Typical road dust dirt and water spots will not affect the automatic high beam system s perform
481. ted the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 25 seconds repeating for approxim ately five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled The driver s or front passenger s safety belt becomes unbuckled for approximately one minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph 9 7 km h and more than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every 25 seconds repeating for approxim ately five minutes or until the safety belts are buckled Deactivating and Activating the Belt Minder Feature WARNING While the system allows you to deactivate it this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate or activate the system while driving the vehicle A Note The driver and front passenger warning are deactivated and activated independently When deactivating or activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation or activation programming procedure 31 The system can be deactivated or activat
482. tem to help operate advanced stability control and accident avoidance systems Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the vehicle must be driven a short distance before the strategy is relearned and all systems are reactivated Load Carrying LOAD LIMIT Vehicle loading with and without a trailer This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle trailer or both to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with PAYLOAD E143816 Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it
483. th are phone dependent features 1 Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu 2 Press Messaging gt Send Text 3 Enter a phone number or choose from your phonebook 4 You can select from the following options Send which sends the message as it is Edit Text which allows you to customize the pre defined message or create a message on your own You can then preview the message and verify the recipient as wells as update the message list and send it to a connected device i e USB drive Text Message Options lll call you back in a few minutes just left I ll be there soon Can you give me acall I m on my way I m running a few minutes late I m ahead of schedule so I ll be there early I m outside Pll call you when get there OK Yes No Thanks Stuck in traffic Call me later LOL 379 MyFord Touch if equipped Receiving a Text Message Dial to call the contact Note f you select View and your vehicle is Ignore to exit the screen traveling over 3 mph 5 km h the system F offers to read the message to you instead Phone Settings of allowing you to view it while driving Press Phone then Settings or the When a new message arrives an audible Settings icon Settings then Phone to tone sounds and the screen displays a select from the following settings pop up with the ca
484. the air filter housing Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter housing and cover to make sure no dirt gets in the engine and to make sure you have a good seal Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated Maintenance 6 Install the air filter housing cover 7 Engage the clamps to secure the air filter housing cover to the air filter housing ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Vertical Aim Adjustment The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer Headlamp Aiming Target E142592 A 8 feet 2 4 meters B Center height of lamp to ground C 25 feet 7 6 meters D Horizontal reference line Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height Note 70 see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other 3 Turnon the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or
485. the information display showing a timer counting down from 30 seconds If the driver does not intervene within 30 seconds the engine shuts down Another message appears in the information display to inform the driver that the engine has shut down in order to save fuel Start the vehicle as you normally do 145 Automatic Engine Shutdown Override Note The automatic engine shutdown feature cannot be permanently switched off When it is temporarily switched off it turns on at the next ignition cycle The engine shutdown can be stopped or the timer reset at any point before the 30 second countdown has expired by doing any of the following The timer can be reset when some kind of interaction with the vehicle is detected such as pressing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal The shutdown feature can be temporarily switched off any time the ignition is on for the current ignition cycle only Use the information display to do so See Information Displays page 83 During the countdown prior to engine shutdown you are prompted to press the OK or RESET button depending on your type of information display to temporarily switch the feature off for the current ignition cycle only STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE When you start the engine the idle speed increases to warm up the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Before starting the engi
486. the system or the vehicle we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle s SYNC module Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent a court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada For further privacy information see the sections on 911 Assist if equipped Vehicle Health Report if equipped and Traffic Directions and Information if equipped MyFord Touch f equipped Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Right Vehicle Information Display if Equipped E145459 The display is located on the right side of your instrument cluster A It allows you to view and make minor adjustments to active modes without taking your hands off the wheel For example In entertainment mode you can view what is now playing change the audio source select presets and make some adjustments In phone mode you can accept or reject an incoming call In navigation mode if equipped you can view the current route or activate a route In climate mode the driver side temperature can bet set as well as fan speed E144811 Use the OK and
487. the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages 86 From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display you can choose from the following categories ra Display Mode Trip 1 amp 2 ry Fuel Economy Scroll up down to highlight one of the categories then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu Information Settings Information Displays Display Mode Use the up down arrow buttons to choose between the following display options Display mode Option Option2 Option3 Option4 Option 5 Option 6 XXX mi km to xX X empty Fuel gauge X X X X Round tachometer X X Vertical tacho X X meter Engine coolant X temp gauge AWD gauge X X XXX mi km to empty Shows the approximate distance the vehicle will travel Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade When the fuel level becomes low the level indicator will change to amber When the fuel level becomes critically low the level indicator will change to red Note When a MyKey is in use low fuel warnings will display earlier The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Round tachometer Indicates the engine speed i
488. the display Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you are not able to answer on your own Monday Saturday 8 30am 8 00pm Inthe United States call 1 888 270 1055 In Canada call 1 800 565 3673 Times are subject to change due to holidays Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving When using SYNC Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and cables where they cannot be stepped on or interfere with the operation of pedals seats compartments or safe driving abilities Do not leave playing devices in the vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage See your device s user guide for further information Do not attempt to service or repair the system See your authorized dealer For your safety some SYNC functions a
489. the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneous Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than three seconds will limit engine rom which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury lt Understanding the Positions of Your Automatic Transmission Putting your vehicle in gear 1 Fully press down the brake pedal 2 Press and hold the button on the front of the gearshift lever 3 Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear 4 Release the button and your transmission will remainin the selected gear E142628 Transmission P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning Come to a complete stop before putting your vehicle into and out of P Park R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to acomplete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six S Sport Moving the gearshift lever to S Sport Provides additional grade engine braking and extends lower gear operation to enh
490. the leave the engine idling for long periods of time we recommend that you do one of the following Open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 centimeters Set your climate control to outside air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER ir EQUIPPED WARNINGS Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged adapters There is arisk of electrical shock A A Note The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below O F 18 C The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant This allows the climate control system to respond quickly The equipment includes a heater element installed in the engine block and a wire harness You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt AC electrical source We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA This extension cord must be able to be used outdoors in cold Starting and Stopping the Engine temperatures and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard Use as short an extension cord as possible Do not use multiple extension
491. the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death 1y If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not 281 Exceed 50 mph 80 km h Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label Tow a trailer Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire Use more than one
492. ther channel Save up to 20 alerts Unlock all stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations Skip no stations Use to restore any channels you previously skipped Parental lock PIN Select to create a PIN which allows you to lock or unlock channels Your initial PIN is 1234 112 Audio System Audio Settings SCV level Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise You can set the system between off and 7 Sound Allows you to adjust sound settings such as treble bass middle fade and balance Occupancy mode Optimizes sound quality for the chosen seating position Set PTY Select to view channel categories pop rock news etc If you select a category seek and scan functions will only stop on channels in that category RBDS RDS Select to view additional broadcast data if available This feature defaults to off RBDS RDS must be on for you to set a category cD Scan all Select to scan all disc selections Scan folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder CD compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level Display Settings Dimming Select to change display brightness Language Select to display the language in English French or Spanish Temp setting Select to display the outside temperature in Fahren
493. these locations Cover the battery power distribution box and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips The windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U S or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts 257 If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Note Do not use sharp objects such a
494. this is rare and known as a false blockage warning A false blocked condition either self corrects or clears after a key cycle E142443 The system uses radar sensors which are located behind the bumper fascia on each side of your vehicle Do not allow these areas to become obstructed by mud snow or bumper stickers as this can cause degraded system performance If the system detects a degraded performance condition a message warning of a blocked sensor or a message warning of low visibility will appear in the information display and the alert indicator illuminates in the appropriate mirror s The information display warning can be cleared but the alert indicator remains illuminated When the blockage is removed the system can be reset in two ways when at least two objects are detected while driving or turn the ignition from on to off then back on If the blockage is still present after the key cycle the system senses again that it is blocked after driving in traffic Driving Aids Reasons for messages being displayed The radar Clean the fascia area in surfaceis front of the radar or remove dirty or the obstruction obstructed The radar Drive normally in traffic for surfaceis afew minutes to allow the not dirty or radar to detect passing obstructed vehicles so it can clear the blocked state Heavy rain No action required The fall snow system automatically fall inter resets to an
495. ticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color 256 Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips Always read the instructions before using the products WAXING Wash the vehicle first Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage Vehicle Care Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around
496. ticularly at risk Your vehicle is equipped with a release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults if they become locked inside the luggage compartment Adults should familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle E144403 The handle is located inside the luggage compartment either on the luggage compartment door lid or near the tail lamps It is composed of a material that will glow for hours in darkness following brief exposure to ambient light Pull the handle and push up on the luggage compartment door lid to open from within the luggage compartment Security PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM Note The system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Metallic objects electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting problems if they are too close to the key when starting the engine Prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine Switch the ignition off move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine if a problem occurs Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle SecuriLock The system is an engine immobilization system It is designed to help pre
497. tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle may have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However insome climates you may need to use snow tires and cables If you need to use cables it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as cables may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Purchase chains or cables froma manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions Use no larger than 15 mm cables or chains ONLY on front axle with 215 60R16 tires Do not use chains or cables on any other size tires The snow chains or cables must be mounted in pairs on the front axle When driving with tire cables do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h or the maximum speed recommended by the chain manufacturer whichever is less Drive cautiously If you hear the cables rub or bang against the vehicle stop and retighten them If this does not work
498. to avoid traffic incidents that develop and impact the current route no notification is provided Manual Have the system always provide a traffic alert notification for traffic incidents along the planned route You have a choice to accept or ignore the notification before the route deviation is made Avoid Areas Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when calculating a route for you Press Add to select a category Once you make a selection the system tries to avoid the area s if possible for all routes To delete a selection choose the listing on the screen when the screen changes to Avoid Areas Edit press Delete at the bottom right of the screen 2D city maps show detailed outlines of Map Mode Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view map mode Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D city maps as well as 3D landmarks when available buildings visible land use and land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe These maps also contain features such as town blocks building footprints and railways MyFord Touch i Equipped 3D landmarks appear as clear visible objects which are typically recognizable and have a certain tourist value The 3D landmarks appear in 3D map mode only 3 00 Cherry Hill Ra E142641 Change the appearance of the map display by repeatedly pressing the arrow bu
499. to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions E152533 Supplementary Restraints System The system consists of the following A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle Side airbags located inside the driver and front passenger seat backs Front passenger sensing system e Crash sensors and monitoring A system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator page 41 Note The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat mounted side airbag if it detects an empty unbuckled passenger seat The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying side curtain airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision Do not lean your head on the door The side curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner Do not attempt to service repair or modify the side curta
500. to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your warranty information for complete details On Board Diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Refueling page 151 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet Fuel and Refueling These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After thr
501. to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming a Spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Note A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle All eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitter or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry portion of the remote control to your vehicle Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys Security You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new unprogrammed key readily accessible See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are not available Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition Switch the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds Switch the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off insert the second previously coded key into the ignition Switch the ignition from off to on Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds Switch the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition After th
502. to select gears Transmission Indicate Mode Lockup Off Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked and free to select gears 105 Audio System GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio Reception Factors Distance Strength Terrain Station Overload CD and CD Player Information Note CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 inch 12 centimeter audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Note CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Note Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway
503. to turn the system on and off When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle Heated rear window Turns the heated rear window on and off See Heated Windows and Mirrors page 126 Temperature control Controls the temperature of the airflow in your vehicle Adjust to select the desired temperature MAX Defrost Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full heat position to turn on Outside air is distributed through the windshield air vents air conditioning is automatically turned on the fan is automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position When MAX defrost is on recirculated air cannot be selected to prevent fogging The heated rear window is automatically switched on when MAX defrost is selected 118 Climate Control G MAX A C Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full cool position Recirculated air is distributed through the instrument panel air vents air conditioning is automatically turned on the fan speed is automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool position This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient H Air distribution control Press these buttons to turn airflow from the windshield instrument panel and footwell vents Air can be distributed through any combination of these air vents At least one of these buttons remain on wh
504. tore function to these switches This feature can be switched on or off in the information display See General Information page 83 Rear Door Unlocking and Opening Pull the interior door release handle twice to unlock and open the rear door The first pull unlocks the door and the second pull will unlatch the door 52 Remote Control The remote control can be used at any time The luggage compartment release button will only work when the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h Unlocking the Doors Two Stage Unlock Press the button to unlock the driver s door Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors The turn signals will flash Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for three seconds to change between driver s door or all doors unlock mode The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking mode was changed Driver s door unlock mode will only unlock the driver s door when the unlock button is pressed once All door unlock mode will unlock all doors with one press of the unlock button The unlocking mode will be applied to the remote control keyless entry keypad and intelligent access The mode can also be changed in the information display See General Information page 83 Locking the Doors Press the button to lock all the A doors The turn signals will illuminate Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors
505. tory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle Refer to your authorized dealer for availability For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels and other features please visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN You need your ESN to activate modify or track your satellite radio account When in satellite radio mode you can view this number by pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time Radio Display Condition Possible Action Acquiring Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel No action required This message should disappear shortly Sat Fault SIRIUS system failure Internal module or system failure present If this message does not clear shortly or with an igni tion key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service Invalid Channel Channel is no longer avail able Tune to another channel or choose another preset 116 Audio System Radio Display Unsubscribed Channel Condition Subscription not available for this channel Possible Action Contact
506. transmitter If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low it may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver s door in this situation See Remote Control page 43 REMOTE CONTROL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters The key blade is used to start the vehicle and unlock or lock the driver s door from outside the vehicle The transmitter portion functions as the remote control E151797 Press the button to release the key Press and hold the button to fold the key back in when not in use Keys and Remote Controls HANAI O HHHH H SAVE FOR CUSTOMER RECORDS E151795 Note Your vehicle s keys were issued with a security tag that provides important vehicle key cut information Keep the tag in a Safe place for future reference Intelligent Access Key if Equipped E144506 Your vehicle may be equipped with two intelligent access keys which operate the power locks and the remote start system The key must be in the vehicle to activate the push button start system Removable Key Blade The intelligent access key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that can be used to unlock the driver door E151796 Slide the release on the back of the remote control an
507. travel In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds toa maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs All Wheel Drive if Equipped Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand This will cause the AWD system to overheat After the system has cooled down normal AWD function will return Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and Water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks if possible and proc
508. tries per Bluetooth enabled cellular phone Note Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the transmission is in position P Note 7o scroll through the menus press the up and down arrows on your audio system Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands free calls 302 SYNC 1 Press the phone button when the display indicates no phone is paired press OK 2 When AddBluetooth Device appears press OK 3 When Find SYNC appears in the display press OK 4 Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode See your phone s user guide if necessary 5 When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display The display indicates when the pairing is successful Depending on your phone s capability and your market the system may prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as the primary phone the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start up downloading your phone book etc Pairing Subsequent Phones Note Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the transmission is in position P Phone Voice Commands Note 70 scroll through the menus press the up and down arrows on your audio system 1 Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected 2 Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected then press OK 3
509. trol Power Press to turn the system on and off When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle Fan speed control Press on either side of the fan icon to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in your vehicle Passenger temperature controls Press or to increase or decrease the air temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle Passenger heated seat control Turn the passenger heated seat on and off See Heated Seats page 134 Recirculated air Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When recirculated air is selected the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may also reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce the possibility of fogging A C Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes Use A C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency MAX A C Turn the temperature control dial all the way past the full cool position Recirculated air is distributed through the instrument panel air vents air conditioning is automatically turned on the fan speed is automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial
510. ts Replacing a Lost Key or Remote GONO ln eb scdastestevenstvccscascecceseseesed 48 Reporting Safety Defects Canada DALY E E 224 443 Reporting Safety Defects U S Only Roadside ASSISTANCE cesses 225 Vehicles Sold In Canada Getting Roadside ASSISTAM CO iasisscsszsaszccossssunsesstsacsiacandissucesscoastanss 225 Vehicles Sold In Canada Using Roadside ASSISTING Obes rscacrsercr sees aAA EER 225 Vehicles Sold In The U S Getting Roadside ASS STANCE iiiar irenda eisai 225 Vehicles Sold In The U S Using Roadside AsSsSisStanC enimi aaka aa 225 Roadside EMergencies cccscccscsesecseceees 225 Running Out Of FUCA cece 152 Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container S Safety Belt Height Adjustment Safety Belt Minder Belt Minder Safety Belts Principle of Operation Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator Conditions of operation Safety Precautions Satellite Radio SIRIUS Satellite Radio Service Troubleshooting Scheduled Maintenance Engine Coolant Change Recor Exceptions General Maintenance Information Normal Scheduled Maintenance Special Operating Conditions Security Settings Index Side Curtain AirDaAgs cesccesesseseseseeeeees 40 Sitting in the Correct Position 0 129 Snow Chains See Using Snow Chains Special Notices New Vehicle Limited Warranty Special INStrUCTIONS ccccscesesseseseseeeseesesteseee
511. tton in the upper left corner of the screen It toggles between three different map modes Heading up North up and 3D Heading up 2D map always P shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen This view is available for map scales up to 2 5 miles 4 kilometers For larger map scales this setting is remembered but the map is shown in North up only If the scale returns below this level then Heading up is restored North up 2D map always shows A the northern direction to be Upward on the screen 3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map This viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated 180 degrees by dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map Re centering the map can be gt Re done by pressing this icon whenever you scroll the map away from your vehicle s current location Auto Zoom Press the green bar to access map mode then select the or zoom button to bring up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the touchscreen When the Auto button is pressed Auto Zoom is turned on and Auto is displayed in the bottom left corner of the screen The map zoom level then synchronizes with vehicle speed The slower the vehicle is traveling the farther in the map is zoomed in the faster the vehicle is traveling the farther the map is zoomed out To turn the feature off just press the or button again Map Icons Vehicle mark shows t
512. tware or any Gracenote Data except in a Tag associated witha music file to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your licenses terminate you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote respectively reserve all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide including any copyrighted material or music file information You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights collectively or separately under this agreement against you directly in each company s own name Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page at www gracenote com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND
513. ty belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Read the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted Properly care for safety belts See Vehicle Care page 255 Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of Dr
514. u Internet Based Services Components The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet based services You acknowledge and agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and or its components that you are utilizing and may provide Upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICE Additional Software Services The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service suppliers MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates 406 supplements add on components or Internet based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE Supplemental Components If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components then the terms of this EULA shall apply If MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent make available Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided then the terms of this EULA shall apply except that the MS Microsoft Corporation or affiliate
515. uce the possibility of fogging 123 Climate Control Passenger temperature control Allows the passenger to set their temperature independent of the driver temperature Press or to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle when in dual zone mode Fan speed control Press the small fan icon or large fan icon to decrease or increase the volume of air circulated in your vehicle Driver temperature control Press or to increase or decrease the air temperature inside the vehicle This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged MAX Defrost Press to switch on Outside air is distributed through the windshield air vents air conditioning is automatically turned on the fan is automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position When MAX defrost is on recirculated air cannot be selected to prevent fogging The heated rear window is automatically switched on when MAX defrost is selected Heated rear window Windows and Mirrors page 126 Defrost Distributes ai Turns the heated rear window on and off See Heated r through the windshield defroster vents and de mister vents This setting can also be used to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE General Hints Note Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the wind
516. uch A to open the moonroof It will stop short of the fully opened position Note This position helps to reduce wind noise or rumbling which may happen with the moonroof fully open Touch A again to fully open the moonroof Touch C to close the moonroof Bounce Back The moonroof will stop automatically and reverse some distance if an obstacle is detected while closing Touch and hold C within two seconds of a bounce back event to override this function Venting the Moonroof Touch B to vent the moonroof Touch C to close it 76 Instrument Cluster GAUGES Type land 2 D E144485 A Tachometer B Information Display Type 2 shown Type 1 similar Speedometer D Fuel Gauge E Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Information Display Outside Air Temperature Shows the outside air temperature Odometer Located in the bottom of the information Compass display Registers the accumulated Displays the vehicle s heading direction distance your vehicle has traveled Trip Computer See General Information page 83 Instrument Cluster Vehicle Settings and Personalization See General Information page 83 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Shows the temperature of the engine coolant At normal operating temperature the needle will remain in the center section If the needle enters the red section the engine is overheating Stop the engine switch the ignition off and determine the caus
517. uch as Joe Wilson rather than Joe Do not use special charac ters such as 123 or ICE as the system does not recognize them If contacts are saved in CAPS you have to spell them JAKE requires you to say Call J A K E 334 MyFord Touch i equipped GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in T loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving Note Some features are not available while the vehicle is moving Note Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off as long as no doors are opened This system uses a four corner strategy to provide quick access to vehicle features and settings The comprehensive touchscreen provides easy interaction with your cellular phone multimedia climate control and navigation system The corners display any active modes within those menus such as your phone being connected or the climate temperature S
518. udge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California without giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration both TeleNav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara California The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply 7 Assignment You may not resell assign or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations except in totality in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement Any such sale assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement without liability to TeleNav in which case you andall other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software Notwithstanding the foregoing TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement 8 Miscellaneou
519. uel tank 17 5 gal 66 2 L Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS M6C65 A2 and ISO 4925 Class 6 Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause brake system damage 7Approximate dry fill capacity Actual amount may vary during fluid changes Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval See Scheduled Maintenance page 420 See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS M2C946 A SAE 5W 30 2 0L engine or WSS M2C945 A SAE 5W 20 1 6L and 2 5L engines and display the API Certification Mark Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil which gives a fuel economy benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods reduced engine performance reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle 292 Accessories For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for yo
520. uirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in your vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size height weight or age Recommended restraint type Infants or Children weighing 40 lb 18 kg or less Use a child safety seat toddlers generally age four or younger sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat gener ally children who are less than 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 lb 18 kg and 80
521. ulated air Touch the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When recirculated air is selected the button illuminates and the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may also reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce the possibility of fogging E MAX A C Touch to switch on Recirculated air is distributed through the instrument panel air vents air conditioning is automatically adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool position This re cooling of the interior is more economical and efficient F A C Touch to turn air conditioning on or off To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes Use A C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency 392 MyFord Touch i equipped G AUTO Touch to turn on fully automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system automatically adjusts fan speed air distribution A C operation and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature H Rear defroster Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated mirrors if equipped Manualairflow distribution controls Floor Defrost
522. uld wear one and one half 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AAABC WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature ABC WARNING The temperature grade for this tire T is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce t
523. unds the system says Please say a commana Another tone sounds to let you know the system is listening 2 Say any of the following commands Voice Settings Using Voice Commands Interaction mode novice Interaction mode advanced Confirmation prompts on Confirmation prompts off Phone candidate lists on Phone candidate lists off Media candidate lists on Media candidate lists off Help Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch between using voice commands and making on screen selections This is most often available when using navigation 344 On screen buttons are outlined in blue to indicate the selections that are part of the dual mode feature For example if while you are in a voice session rather than saying the command Enter street name to change the field you can press Street and the voice session does not end Instead the voice system changes to the Street field and asks you to say the street name The buttons not outlined in blue cannot be used as voice commands if they are touched during a voice session the voice session is canceled For example you can choose from the following on the Navigation home screen My Home Favorites MyFord Touch it Equipped Previous Destinations Intersection Point of Interest POI Cancel Route Emergency Some of
524. up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb for maximum payload The payload listed onthe Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer Load Carrying installed equipment has been WARNING installed on the vehicle the weight The appropriate loading capacity of of the equipment must be your vehicle can be limited either by subtracted from the payload volume capacity how much space listed on the Tire Label inorderto _ S vailable or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry determine the new payload Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover Example only SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION Y e MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL SPARE 7145 80D16 420 KPA 60PS INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY 1 5 FRONT T REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 1AVANT 1_ ARRI RE XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX E142516 The combined weight of occupants and carg
525. upon activation After airbag deployment itis normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required Supplementary Restraints System SOS POST CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn intermittently inthe event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners The horn
526. ur gap distance settings are available Graphic display Following distance bars between vehicles Following distance Dynamic behavior at 60 mph 100 km h 1 bar 1 second 29 yards 28 m Sporty 2 bars 1 5 seconds 44 yards 42 m Normal 3 bars 1 9 seconds 56 yards 53 m Normal 4 bars 2 3 seconds 66 yards 64 m Comfort Each time the vehicle is restarted the last chosen gap for the current driver will be automatically selected Disengaging the System Press the brake pedal or press CNCL The last set speed will be displayed witha strikethrough but will not be erased Overriding the System WARNING Whenever the driver is overriding the system by pressing the accelerator pedal the system will not automatically apply the brakes to maintain separation from any vehicle ahead The set speed and gap distance can be overridden by pressing the accelerator pedal illuminated and the follow vehicle is not shown in the information display The system will resume operation when you release the accelerator pedal The vehicle speed will decrease to the set speed or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle When you override the system the green indicator light is 186 Cruise Control Changing the Set Speed Accelerate or brake to the desired speed then press and release SET Press and hold SET or SET until the desired set speed is shown on the information
527. ur vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information Ford strongly recommends the use of only genuine Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized re manufactured replacement parts because they are engineered for your vehicle 421 Additives and Chemicals Recommended additives and chemicals are listed in this owner s manual and in the Ford Workshop Manual Additional chemicals or additives not approved by Ford Motor Company are not recommended as part of normal maintenance Please consult your warranty information Oils Fluids and Flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed However discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your dealership Your vehicle s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for
528. ur vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at Accessories Ford com U S only Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Ford Custom Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty Exterior style Hood deflectors Side window deflectors Splash guards Rear spoiler Wheels Bumper protectors Interior style All weather floor mats Rear seat entertainment Premium carpeted floor mats Lighted door sill plates Electrochromatic compass temperature interior mirrors Lifestyle Ash cup smoker s packages Roof racks and carriers Cargo area protectors Cargo net Cargo organizers Interior light kit Peace of mind Remote start Vehicle security systems Wheel locks Bumper mounted parking sensor Locking fuel plug for capless fuel system Ford Licensed Accessories FLA are warranted by the accessory manufacturer s warranty Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed and de
529. utton to activate the md alarm Press the button again or turn the ignition on to deactivate Remote Start if Equipped WARNING To avoid exhaust fumes do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated Note Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle has remote start if 2x the transmitter has this button The remote start feature allows you to start the vehicle from outside the vehicle The transmitter has an extended operating range Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate when the vehicle is remote started See Climate Control page 118 A manual climate control system will run at the setting it was set to when the vehicle was last turned off Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems The remote start system will not work if the ignition is on the alarm system is triggered the feature has been disabled the hood is not closed two remote vehicle starts have already been attempted within the last hour the vehicle is not in P the vehicle battery voltage is too low the service engine soon light is on Remote Control Feedback An LED on the remote control provides status feedback of remote start or stop commands LED Status Remote start or extension su
530. vate for both front seat occupantsin a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal and near frontal collisions and may also activate when a side curtain deploys A knee airbag deploys from under the instrument panel when the front airbag activates in a collision Side airbags and side curtain airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not rollovers rear impacts frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel 42 Keys and Remote Controls GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may caus
531. vehicle has been running a minimum of 60 seconds 1 Press the phone button to enter the Phone menu Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK Scroll to select from User Preferences or Run Report 2 3 SYNC Vehicle Health Report Options User Preferences Press OK to select and enter the menu Scroll to select from Automatic Reports Press OK and select onor off Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a health report at certain mileage intervals You must first turn this feature on before you can select the mileage intervals at which you would like to be prompted Mileage Intervals Press OK Scroll to select between 5000 7500 or 10000 mile intervals and press OK to make your selection Return Press OK to exit the menu Run Report Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle s diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it is combined with scheduled maintenance information open recalls and other field service actions and unserviced vehicle inspection items from your authorized dealer Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice When you run a Vehicle Health Report Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number to process your report request and diagnostic information about your vehicle Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information Ford may use the vehicle in
532. veloped by the accessory manufacturer and have not been designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer s limited warranty and a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle Accessories When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate
533. vent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting A message may appear in the information display If you are unable to start the engine witha correctly coded key a malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information display Automatic Arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition off Automatic Disarming Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle Replacement Keys Note Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters or two intelligent access keys The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle as well as a remote control The intelligent access key functions asa programmed key that operates the driver s door lock and activates the intelligent access with push button start systems as well as aremote control If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys integrated keyhead transmitters only are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Store anextra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences See your authorized dealer
534. vestment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor system which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change service interval This interval may be up to one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers Scheduled Maintenance When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display it is time for an oil change The oil change must be done within two weeks or 500 miles 800 kilometers of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing The Intelligent Oil Life Monitor must be reset after each oil change See Engine Oil Check page 243 If your information display is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles 8000 kilometers from your last oil change Never exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between oil change intervals Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair yo
535. ving modes to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as an administrator key or admin key which can be used to create a restricted key program optional MyKey settings clear all MyKey features altogether Once a key has been programmed you can access the following information using the information display control How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle The total distance the vehicle has been driven with a MyKey For vehicles equipped with intelligent access key push button start when both a MyKey and an admin intelligent access key fob are present the admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle to start the engine Standard Settings These settings cannot be changed Belt Minder This cannot be disabled and the five minute timer does not expire The audio system is muted when MyKey Belt Minder is activated Early low fuel Warnings are displayed in the information display control followed by an audible tone when the fuel tank is at one eighth tank or less Driver assist features if equipped on your vehicle are forced on Rear parking aid Blind spot information system BLIS with cross traffic alert Lane departure warning Forward collision warning system and Satellite radio adult content restriction 49 Optional Settings Thes
536. warranty does not cover these types of damage Tires should always be kept at the correct inflation pressures and extra caution should be taken when operating on rough roads to avoid impacts that could cause wheel and tire damage Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading 5 M v E142542 Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 Wheels and Tires U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 wo
537. wearing gloves Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch control graphic Touching off center of the graphic may cause a nearby control to turn on or off Do not press hard on the controls They are sensitive to light touch Metal and other conductive material should be kept away from the surface of the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference i e control activation Depending on your vehicle and option package you may also have these controls on your bezel Power Turn the media or climate features on or off VOL Increase or decrease the volume Fan Increase or decrease the fan speed Seek and Tune buttons Use as you normally would in media modes Eject Eject a CD SOURCE Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media modes The screen does not change but you see the media change in the lower left status bar SOUND Touch the word to access the Sound menu where you can make adjustments to settings such as Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP if equipped Occupancy Mode if equipped and Speed Compensated Volume Hazard flasher Press the button to turn the hazard flashers on or off MyFord Touch if equipped Cleaning the Touchscreen Display Clean the display with a clean soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses If dirt or finger prints are still visible apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth Do not pour or spray alcohol onto
538. wer than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel ABS do not pump the brakes See Hints on Driving With Anti Lock Brakes page 168 for more information on the operation of the anti lock brake system ABS Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lowering kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder or luggage racks Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off highway usage 167 Brakes GENERAL INFORMATION Note Occasiona
539. when the rear window controls are locked Accessory Delay You can use the window switches for several minutes after you have switched the ignition off or until either front door is opened EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior Mirrors WARNING Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving E144073 A Left hand mirror B Adjustment control C Right hand mirror To adjust a mirror 1 Select the mirror you want to adjust The control will illuminate 2 Adjust the position of the mirror 3 Press the mirror switch again Fold Away Exterior Mirrors Push the mirror toward the door window glass Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position Heated Exterior Mirrors if Equipped See Heated Windows and Mirrors page 126 Memory Mirrors it equipped You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function See Memory Function page 132 Auto Dimming Feature it Equipped The driver s exterior mirror will automatically dim when the interior auto dimming mirror is activated Windows and Mirrors Signal Indicator Mirrors it equipped The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink when the turn signal is activated Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors it Equipped WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the u
540. wsing etc Press for more information Gateway Access Point Settings View and change settings for using SYNC as the internet gateway Gateway Access Point Device List View who has connected to your Wi Fi connection recently USB Mobile Broadband Instead of using Wi Fi your system can also use a USB mobile broadband connection to access the internet You must activate your mobile broadband device on your PC prior to connecting it to the system This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection USB mobile broadband settings may not be displayed if the device is already activated You can select the following Country Carrier Phone Number User Name and Password Bluetooth Settings Shows you what device is currently paired with the system as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect disconnect set as favorite delete and add device Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG Prioritize Connection Methods Choose your connection methods and change them as needed You can select to Change Order and have the system either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile broadband or using Wi Fi 354 MyFord Touch i Equipped FFD The Wi Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi Fi Alliance Help Press the Settings icon gt Help then select CERTIFIED from the following E142626
541. y E87786 UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW 1 6L ECOBOOST E144363 240 Maintenance Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir cap Battery Power distribution box Engine air filter assembly Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap Ta7aMmUVAD DS UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW 2 0L ECOBOOST E144364 Engine coolant reservoir cap Engine oil dipstick Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir cap UO WD gt o 241 Maintenance Battery Power distribution box Engine air filter assembly IOn m Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW 2 5L A B C D E F H G E145592 Engine coolant reservoir cap Engine oil filler cap Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir cap Battery Power distribution box Air filter housing cover IOn monou Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap 242 Maintenance ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK 1 6L ECOBOOST B Cc Zee a Da E146020 A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK 2 5L 2 0L ECOBOOST E142462 A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL CHECK 2 5L 1 6L ECOBOOST 2 0L ECOBOOST Note Check the level before starting the engine Note Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks 1 Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground 2 Turnthe engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Remove the dipstick an
542. y See General Information page 83 System Indicator Lights and Messages WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac system the stability control light will illuminate steadily Verify that the AdvanceTrac system was not manually disabled through the information display If the stability control light still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The stability control light ee temporarily illuminates on engine start up and flashes when a driving condition activates the stability system The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine start up and stays on when the traction control system is turned off When the traction control system is turned off or on a message appears in the information display showing system status Stability Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system Install any afterm
543. y indicator light ED CD ED E82311 The current gap setting and SET will also display Setting a Speed 1 Accelerate to the desired speed 2 Press and release SET The vehicle speed will be stored in the memory Cruise Control 3 The information display will show a green indicator light current gap setting and desired set speed 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal eS D L j Ez D E82312 ER 5 A lead vehicle graphic will illuminate if there is a vehicle detected in front of you Note When adaptive cruise control is active the set speed displayed in the information display may vary slightly from the speedometer Following a Vehicle WARNINGS When following a vehicle in front of you the vehicle will not decelerate automatically to a stop nor will the vehicle always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver intervention Always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may result ina collision serious injury or death Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may result in acollision serious injury or death Note The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system When a vehicle ahead of you enter
544. y it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance chapter will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life Front wheel drive vehicles front tires on the left side of the diagram oe ES E142547 E Four wheel drive vehicles front tires on the left side of the diagram n N C E142548 Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Summer Tires Your Ford vehicle may be equipped with summer tires to provide superior performance on wet and dry roads Summer tires do not have the Mud and Snow M S or M S tire traction rating on the tire side wall Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as All season or Snow tires Ford does not recommend using summer tires when temperatures drop to approximately 40 F 59C or below depending on tire wear and environmental conditions or in snow and ice conditions Like any tire summer tire performance is affected by tire wear and environmental conditions If you must drive in those conditions Ford recommends using Mud and Snow M S M S All season or Snow tires Wheels and Tires USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING Snow
545. y paired phone connects Note Fvery phone operates differently While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones some may have trouble using this feature 389 If a crash deploys an airbag or activates the fuel pump shut off your SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone For more information about 911 Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca See Supplementary Restraints System page 34 Important information regarding airbag deployment is in this chapter See Roadside Emergencies page 225 Important information regarding the fuel pump shut off is in this chapter Setting 911 Assist On Press the Information button gt Apps gt 911 Assist then select On You can also access 911 Assist by Pressing the Settings icon gt Settings gt Phone gt 911 Assist or Pressing the Settings icon gt Help gt 911 Assist To make sure that 911 Assist works properly SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use The 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident A Bluetooth enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and connected to SYNC Aconnected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident MyFord Touch it equipped
546. y permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Limitations on Distributing Copying Modifying and Creating Derivative Works You may not distribute copy make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Single EULA The end user documentation for the DEVICE and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs such as multiple translations and or multiple media versions e g in the user documentation and in the software Even if you receive multiple EULAs you are licensed to use only one 1 copy of the SOFTWARE 405 this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE provided you retain no copies you transfer all of the SOFTWARE including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades and if applicable the Certificate s of Authenticity and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE Termination Without prejudice to any other rights FORD MOTOR COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA Security Updates Digital Rights Management Content owners use the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their intellectual property included copyrighted conte

Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents